diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/About.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/About.htm
index 499560793..e853f1609 100644
--- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/About.htm
+++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/About.htm
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
 			and edit documents<span class="onlineDocumentFeatures"> directly in your browser</span>.</p>
 			<p>Using <b>Document Editor</b>, you can perform various editing operations like in any desktop editor, 
 			print the edited documents keeping all the formatting details or download them onto your computer hard disk drive 
-			as PDF, TXT, DOCX, ODT, or HTML files.</p>
+			as DOCX, PDF, TXT, ODT, RTF, or HTML files.</p>
 			<p>To view the current software version and licensor details, click the <img alt="About icon" src="../images/about.png" /> icon at the left sidebar.</p>
 		</div>
 	</body>
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm
index 07b26c657..5a96e26c6 100644
--- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm
+++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm
@@ -14,13 +14,13 @@
             <input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
         </div>
         <h1>Advanced Settings of Document Editor</h1>
-        <p><b>Document Editor</b> lets you change its advanced settings. To access them, open the <b>File</b> tab at the top toolbar and select the <b>Advanced Settings...</b> option. You can also use the <img alt="Advanced settings icon" src="../images/advanced_settings_icon.png" /> icon in the right upper corner at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar.</p>
+        <p><b>Document Editor</b> lets you change its advanced settings. To access them, open the <b>File</b> tab at the top toolbar and select the <b>Advanced Settings...</b> option. You can also click the <b>View settings</b> <img alt="View settings icon" src="../images/viewsettingsicon.png" /> icon on the right side of the editor header and select the <b>Advanced settings</b> option.</p>
         <p>The advanced settings are:</p>
         <ul>
             <li><b>Commenting Display</b> is used to turn on/off the live commenting option: 
             <ul>
                 <li><b>Turn on display of the comments</b> - if you disable this feature, the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the <b>Comments</b> <img alt="Comments icon" src="../images/commentsicon.png" /> icon at the left sidebar.</li>
-                <li><b>Turn on display of the resolved comments</b> - if you disable this feature, the resolved comments will be hidden in the document text. You'll be able to view such comments only if you click the <b>Comments</b> <img alt="Comments icon" src="../images/commentsicon.png" /> icon at the left sidebar.</li>
+                <li><b>Turn on display of the resolved comments</b> - this feature is disabled by default so that the resolved comments were hidden in the document text. You can view such comments only if you click the <b>Comments</b> <img alt="Comments icon" src="../images/commentsicon.png" /> icon at the left sidebar. Enable this option if you want to display resolved comments in the document text.</li>
             </ul>
             </li>
             <li><b>Spell Checking</b> is used to turn on/off the spell checking option.</li>
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm
index b7864c1c7..9043572c0 100644
--- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm
+++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm
@@ -24,10 +24,15 @@
 					<td class="description">Open the <b>File</b> panel to save, download, print the current document, view its info, create a new document or open an existing one, access Document Editor help or advanced settings.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
-					<td>Open 'Search' panel</td>
+					<td>Open 'Find and Replace' dialog box</td>
 					<td>Ctrl+F</td>
-					<td>Open the <b>Search</b> panel to start searching for a character/word/phrase in the currently edited document.</td>
+					<td>Open the <b>Find and Replace</b> dialog box to start searching for a character/word/phrase in the currently edited document.</td>
 				</tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Open 'Find and Replace' dialog box with replacement field</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+H</td>
+                    <td>Open the <b>Find and Replace</b> dialog box with the replacement field to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters.</td>
+                </tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Open 'Comments' panel</td>
 					<td>Ctrl+Shift+H</td>
@@ -46,7 +51,7 @@
 				<tr>
 					<td>Save document</td>
 					<td>Ctrl+S</td>
-					<td>Save all the changes to the document currently edited with Document Editor.</td>
+					<td>Save all the changes to the document currently edited with Document Editor. The active file will be saved with its current file name, location, and file format.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Print document</td>
@@ -56,7 +61,7 @@
 				<tr>
 					<td>Download As...</td>
 					<td>Ctrl+Shift+S</td>
-					<td>Save the currently edited document to the computer hard disk drive in one of the supported formats: PDF, TXT, DOCX, ODT, HTML.</td>
+					<td>Open the <b>Download as...</b> panel to save the currently edited document to the computer hard disk drive in one of the supported formats: DOCX, PDF, TXT, ODT, RTF, HTML.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Full screen</td>
@@ -67,6 +72,26 @@
                     <td>Help menu</td>
                     <td>F1</td>
                     <td>Open Document Editor <b>Help</b> menu.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Open existing file</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+O</td>
+                    <td>On the <b>Open local file</b> tab in desktop editors, opens the standard dialog box that allows to select an existing file.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Element contextual menu</td>
+                    <td>Shift+F10</td>
+                    <td>Open the selected element <b>contextual menu</b>.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Close file</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+W</td>
+                    <td>Close the selected document window.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Close the window (tab)</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+F4</td>
+                    <td>Close the tab in a browser.</td>
                 </tr>
 				<tr>
 					<th colspan="3">Navigation</th>
@@ -93,34 +118,74 @@
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Scroll down</td>
-					<td>PgDn</td>
+					<td>Page Down</td>
 					<td>Scroll the document approximately one visible page down.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Scroll up</td>
-					<td>PgUp</td>
+					<td>Page Up</td>
 					<td>Scroll the document approximately one visible page up.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Next page</td>
-					<td>Alt+PgDn</td>
+					<td>Alt+Page Down</td>
 					<td>Go to the next page in the currently edited document.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Previous page</td>
-					<td>Alt+PgUp</td>
+					<td>Alt+Page Up</td>
 					<td>Go to the previous page in the currently edited document.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Zoom In</td>
-					<td>Ctrl+plus (+)</td>
+					<td>Ctrl+Plus sign (+)</td>
 					<td>Zoom in the currently edited document.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Zoom Out</td>
-					<td>Ctrl+minus (-)</td>
+					<td>Ctrl+Minus sign (-)</td>
 					<td>Zoom out the currently edited document.</td>
 				</tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Move one character to the left</td>
+                    <td>Left arrow</td>
+                    <td>Move the cursor one character to the left.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Move one character to the right</td>
+                    <td>Right arrow</td>
+                    <td>Move the cursor one character to the right.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Move to the beginning of a word or one word to the left</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+Left arrow</td>
+                    <td>Move the cursor to the beginning of a word or one word to the left.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Move one word to the right</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+Right arrow</td>
+                    <td>Move the cursor one word to the right.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <!--<tr>
+                    <td>Move one paragraph up</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+Up arrow</td>
+                    <td>Move the cursor one paragraph up.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Move one paragraph down</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+Down arrow</td>
+                    <td>Move the cursor one paragraph down.</td>
+                </tr>-->
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Move one line up</td>
+                    <td>Up arrow</td>
+                    <td>Move the cursor one line up.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Move one line down</td>
+                    <td>Down arrow</td>
+                    <td>Move the cursor one line down.</td>
+                </tr>
 				<tr>
 					<th colspan="3">Writing</th>
 				</tr>
@@ -218,6 +283,36 @@
 					<td>Shift+End</td>
 					<td>Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the current line.</td>
 				</tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Select one character to the right</td>
+                    <td>Shift+Right arrow</td>
+                    <td>Select one character to the right of the cursor position.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Select one character to the left</td>
+                    <td>Shift+Left arrow</td>
+                    <td>Select one character to the left of the cursor position.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Select to the end of a word</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+Shift+Right arrow</td>
+                    <td>Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of a word.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Select to the beginning of a word</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+Shift+Left arrow</td>
+                    <td>Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of a word.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Select one line up</td>
+                    <td>Shift+Up arrow</td>
+                    <td>Select one line up (with the cursor at the beginning of a line).</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Select one line down</td>
+                    <td>Shift+Down arrow</td>
+                    <td>Select one line down (with the cursor at the beginning of a line).</td>
+                </tr>
 				<tr>
 					<th colspan="3">Text Styling</th>
 				</tr>
@@ -312,6 +407,21 @@
 					<td>Ctrl+L</td>
 					<td>Align left with the text lined up by the left side of the page, the right side remains unaligned. If your text is initially left-aligned</td>
 				</tr>-->
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Apply subscript formatting (automatic spacing)</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+Equal sign (=)</td>
+                    <td>Apply subscript formatting to the selected text fragment.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Apply superscript formatting (automatic spacing)</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+Shift+Plus sign (+)</td>
+                    <td>Apply superscript  formatting to the selected text fragment.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Insert page break</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+Enter</td>
+                    <td>Insert a page break at the current cursor position.</td>
+                </tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Increase indent</td>
 					<td>Ctrl+M</td>
@@ -325,15 +435,30 @@
                 <tr>
                     <td>Add page number</td>
                     <td>Ctrl+Shift+P</td>
-                    <td>Add the current page number to the text or to the page footer.</td>
+                    <td>Add the current page number at the current cursor position.</td>
                 </tr>
+                <!--<tr>
+                    <td>Add dash</td>
+                    <td>Num-</td>
+                    <td>Add a dash.</td>
+                </tr>-->
 				<tr>
 					<td>Nonprinting characters</td>
-					<td>Ctrl+*</td>
+					<td>Ctrl+Shift+Num8</td>
 					<td>Show or hide the display of nonprinting characters.</td>
 				</tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Delete one character to the left</td>
+                    <td>Backspace</td>
+                    <td>Delete one character to the left of the cursor.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Delete one character to the right</td>
+                    <td>Delete</td>
+                    <td>Delete one character to the right of the cursor.</td>
+                </tr>
 				<tr>
-					<th colspan="3">Modifying Objects</th>
+					<th colspan="3"><a id="workwithobjects"></a>Modifying Objects</th>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Constrain movement</td>
@@ -350,11 +475,63 @@
 					<td>Shift+drag (when resizing)</td>
 					<td>Maintain the proportions of the selected object when resizing.</td>
 				</tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Draw straight line or arrow</td>
+                    <td>Shift+drag (when drawing lines/arrows)</td>
+                    <td>Draw a straight vertical/horizontal/45-degree line or arrow.</td>
+                </tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Movement by one-pixel increments</td>
-					<td>Ctrl</td>
+					<td>Ctrl+Arrow keys</td>
 					<td>Hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by one pixel at a time.</td>
 				</tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <th colspan="3"><a id="workwithtables"></a>Working with Tables</th>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Move to the next cell in a row</td>
+                    <td>Tab</td>
+                    <td>Go to the next cell in a table row.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Move to the previous cell in a row</td>
+                    <td>Shift+Tab</td>
+                    <td>Go to the previous cell in a table row.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Move to the next row</td>
+                    <td>Down arrow</td>
+                    <td>Go to the next row in a table.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Move to the previous row</td>
+                    <td>Up arrow</td>
+                    <td>Go to the previous row in a table.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Start new paragraph</td>
+                    <td>Enter</td>
+                    <td>Start a new paragraph within a cell.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Add new row</td>
+                    <td>Tab in the lower right table cell.</td>
+                    <td>Add a new row at the bottom of the table.</td>
+                </tr>
+                
+                <tr>
+                    <th colspan="3">Inserting special characters</th>
+                </tr>
+                <!--<tr>
+                    <td>Insert the Euro sign</td>
+                    <td>Alt+Ctrl+E</td>
+                    <td>Insert the Euro sign (€) at the current cursor position.</td>
+                </tr>-->
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Insert formula</td>
+                    <td>Alt+Equal sign (=)</td>
+                    <td>Insert a formula at the current cursor position.</td>
+                </tr>
 			</table>
 		</div>
 	</body>
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm
index e2af19b19..445b96aa9 100644
--- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm
+++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm
@@ -16,12 +16,12 @@
 		<h1>View Settings and Navigation Tools</h1>
 			<p><b>Document Editor</b> offers several tools to help you view and navigate through your document: zoom, page number indicator etc.</p>
 			<h3>Adjust the View Settings</h3>
-			<p>To adjust default view settings and set the most convenient mode to work with the document, switch to the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar, click the <b>View settings</b> <img alt="View settings icon" src="../images/viewsettingsicon.png" /> icon at the upper right corner and select which interface elements you want to be hidden or shown.
+			<p>To adjust default view settings and set the most convenient mode to work with the document, click the <b>View settings</b> <img alt="View settings icon" src="../images/viewsettingsicon.png" /> icon on the right side of the editor header and select which interface elements you want to be hidden or shown.
 			You can select the following options from the <b>View settings</b> drop-down list:
 			</p>
 			<ul>
                 <li>
-                    <b>Hide Toolbar</b> -  hides the top toolbar that contains commands while tabs remain visible. When this option is enabled, you can click any tab to display the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed until you click anywhere outside it.<br />To disable this mode switch to the <b>Home</b> tab, then click the <b>View settings</b> <img alt="View settings icon" src="../images/viewsettingsicon.png" /> icon and click the <b>Hide Toolbar</b> option once again. The top toolbar will be displayed all the time.
+                    <b>Hide Toolbar</b> -  hides the top toolbar that contains commands while tabs remain visible. When this option is enabled, you can click any tab to display the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed until you click anywhere outside it.<br />To disable this mode, click the <b>View settings</b> <img alt="View settings icon" src="../images/viewsettingsicon.png" /> icon and click the <b>Hide Toolbar</b> option once again. The top toolbar will be displayed all the time.
                     <p class="note"><b>Note</b>: alternatively, you can just double-click any tab to hide the top toolbar or display it again.</p>
                 </li>
 			<li><b>Hide Status Bar</b> - hides the bottommost bar where the <b>Page Number Indicator</b> and <b>Zoom</b> buttons are situated. To show the hidden <b>Status Bar</b> click this option once again.</li>
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm
index 0a73b942d..60f27953b 100644
--- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm
+++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
         </div>
 		<h1>Search and Replace Function</h1>
 			<p>To search for the needed characters, words or phrases used in the currently edited document, 
-			click the <img alt="Search icon" src="../images/searchicon.png" /> icon situated at the left sidebar. </p>
+			click the <img alt="Search icon" src="../images/searchicon.png" /> icon situated at the left sidebar or use the <em>Ctrl+F</em> key combination. </p>
 			<p>The <b>Find and Replace</b> window will open:</p>
             <p><img alt="Find and Replace Window" src="../images/search_window.png" /></p>
 			<ol>
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
 			</li>
 			</ol>
 			<p>The first occurrence of the required characters in the selected direction will be highlighted on the page. If it is not the word you are looking for, click the selected button again to find the next occurrence of the characters you entered.</p> 
-			<p><b>To replace</b> one or more occurrences of the found characters click the <b>Replace</b> link below the data entry field. The <b>Find and Replace</b> window will change:</p>
+			<p><b>To replace</b> one or more occurrences of the found characters click the <b>Replace</b> link below the data entry field or use the <em>Ctrl+H</em> key combination. The <b>Find and Replace</b> window will change:</p>
             <p><img alt="Find and Replace Window" src="../images/search_replace_window.png" /></p>
 			<ol>
 			<li>Type in the replacement text into the bottom data entry field.</li>			
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm
index 38c9ef2b6..c92a6bbb0 100644
--- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm
+++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@
 					<td>Rich Text Format<br />Document file format developed by Microsoft for cross-platform document interchange</td>
 					<td>+</td>
 					<td>+</td>
-					<td></td>
+					<td>+</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>TXT</td>
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm
index bf4fb2d45..7dd5ad011 100644
--- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm
+++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
             <input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
         </div>
 			<h1>Home tab</h1>
-            <p>The <b>Home</b> tab opens by default when you open a document. It allows to format font and paragraphs. Some other options are also available here, such as Mail Merge, color schemes, view settings.</p>
+            <p>The <b>Home</b> tab opens by default when you open a document. It allows to format font and paragraphs. Some other options are also available here, such as Mail Merge and color schemes.</p>
             <p><img alt="Home tab" src="../images/interface/hometab.png" /></p>
             <p>Using this tab, you can:</p>
             <ul>
@@ -29,8 +29,7 @@
                 <li><a href="../UsageInstructions/CopyClearFormatting.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">copy/clear</a> text formatting,</li>
                 <li>change <a href="../UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">color scheme</a>,</li>
                 <li>use <a href="../UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Mail Merge</a>,</li>
-                <li>manage <a href="../UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">styles</a>,</li>
-                <li>adjust <a href="../HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">View Settings</a> and access the editor <a href="../HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Advanced Settings</a>.</li>
+                <li>manage <a href="../UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">styles</a>.</li>
             </ul>
 		</div>
 	</body>
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm
index ddaa66107..ebb9517ae 100644
--- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm
+++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
             <p><img alt="Editor window" src="../images/interface/editorwindow.png" /></p>
             <p>The editor interface consists of the following main elements:</p>
             <ol>
-                <li><b>Editor header</b> displays the logo, menu tabs, document name as well as two icons on the right that allow to <a href="../HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">set access rights</a> and return to the Documents list.
+                <li><b>Editor header</b> displays the logo, menu tabs, document name as well as three icons on the right that allow to <a href="../HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">set access rights</a>, return to the Documents list, adjust <a href="../HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">View Settings</a> and access the editor <a href="../HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Advanced Settings</a>.
                 <p><img alt="Icons in the editor header" src="../images/interface/rightpart.png" /></p>
                 </li>
                 <li><b>Top toolbar</b> displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: <a href="../ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">File</a>, <a href="../ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Home</a>, <a href="../ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Insert</a>, <a href="../ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Layout</a>, <a href="../ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">References</a>, <a href="../ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Collaboration</a>, <a href="../ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Plugins</a>.
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm
index 81ceae6fa..f413784a5 100644
--- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm
+++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 				<li>click the <img alt="Hyperlink icon" src="../images/addhyperlink.png" /> <b>Hyperlink</b> icon at the top toolbar,</li>
 				<li>after that the <b>Hyperlink Settings</b> window will appear where you can specify the hyperlink parameters:
 				<ul>
-					<li><b>Link to</b> - enter a URL in the format <i>http://www.example.com</i>.</li>
+					<li><b>Link to</b> - enter a URL in the format <em>http://www.example.com</em>.</li>
 					<li><b>Display</b> - enter a text that will get clickable and lead to the web address specified in the upper field.</li>
 					<li><b>ScreenTip text</b> - enter a text that will become visible in a small pop-up window that provides a brief note or label pertaining to the hyperlink being pointed to.</li>
 				</ul>
@@ -29,10 +29,9 @@
 				</li>
 				<li>Click the <b>OK</b> button.</li>
 			</ol>
-			<p>To add a hyperlink, you can also click with the right mouse button at a position where a hyperlink will be added and select the <b>Hyperlink</b> option in the menu that opens the window displayed above.</p>
-			<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: it's also possible to select a caracter, word, word combination, text passage with the mouse or <a href="../HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm#textselection" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">using the keyboard</a> and
-			click the <img alt="Hyperlink icon" src="../images/addhyperlink.png" /> <b>Hyperlink</b> icon at the <b>Insert</b> or <b>References</b> tab of the top toolbar or right-click the selection and choose the <b>Hyperlink</b> option in the menu. 
-			After that the window displayed above will open with the <b>Display</b> field filled with the text fragment you selected.</p>
+            <p>To add a hyperlink, you can also use the <b>Ctrl+K</b> key combination or click with the right mouse button at a position where a hyperlink will be added and select the <b>Hyperlink</b> option in the right-click menu.</p>
+			<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: it's also possible to select a character, word, word combination, text passage with the mouse or <a href="../HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm#textselection" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">using the keyboard</a> and
+			then open the <b>Hyperlink Settings</b> window as described above. In this case, the <b>Display</b> field will be filled with the text fragment you selected.</p>
 			<p>By hovering the cursor over the added hyperlink, the ScreenTip will appear containing the text you specified. 
 			You can follow the link by pressing the <b>CTRL</b> key and clicking the link in your document.</p>
 			<p>To edit or delete the added hyperlink, click it with the right mouse button, select the <b>Hyperlink</b> option and then the action you want to perform - <b>Edit Hyperlink</b> or <b>Remove Hyperlink</b>.</p>
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm
index 6ff8fe812..e5ca35649 100644
--- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm
+++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
 				</li>
 				<li>now each time you press the <b>Enter</b> key at the end of the line a new ordered or unordered list item will appear. To stop that, press the <b>Backspace</b> key and continue with the common text paragraph.</li>
 			</ol>
-			<p>You can also change the text indentation in the lists and their nesting using the <b>Outline</b> <img alt="Outline icon" src="../images/outline.png" />, <b>Decrease indent</b> <img alt="Decrease indent icon" src="../images/decreaseindent.png" />, and <b>Increase indent</b> <img alt="Increase indent icon" src="../images/increaseindent.png" /> icons at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar.</p>
+			<p>You can also change the text indentation in the lists and their nesting using the <b>Multilevel list</b> <img alt="Multilevel list icon" src="../images/outline.png" />, <b>Decrease indent</b> <img alt="Decrease indent icon" src="../images/decreaseindent.png" />, and <b>Increase indent</b> <img alt="Increase indent icon" src="../images/increaseindent.png" /> icons at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar.</p>
 			<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: the additional indentation and spacing parameters can be changed at the right sidebar and in the advanced settings window. To learn more about it, read the <a href="ParagraphIndents.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Change paragraph indents</a> and <a href="LineSpacing.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Set paragraph line spacing</a> section.</p>
 		</div>
 	</body>
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm
index d22a069cf..7241c708c 100644
--- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm
+++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 				<li>place the cursor within the paragraph you need, or select several paragraphs you want to apply one of the formatting styles to,</li>
 				<li>select the needed style from the style gallery on the right at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar.</li>
 			</ol>
-			<p>The following formatting styles are available: normal, no spacing, heading 1-9, title, subtitle, quote, intense quote, list paragraph.</p>
+			<p>The following formatting styles are available: normal, no spacing, heading 1-9, title, subtitle, quote, intense quote, list paragraph, footer, header, footnote text.</p>
 			<p><img alt="Formatting styles" src="../images/formattingpresets.png" /></p>
             <h3>Edit existing styles and create new ones</h3>
             <p><b>To change an existing style:</b></p>
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm
index cf3761be0..ec461e8a3 100644
--- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm
+++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm
@@ -34,7 +34,10 @@
 			To move the autoshape by one-pixel increments, hold down the <b>Ctrl</b> key and use the keybord arrows. 
 			To move the autoshape strictly horizontally/vertically and prevent it from moving in a perpendicular direction, hold down the <b>Shift</b> key when dragging.</p>
 			<p>To rotate the autoshape, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle <img alt="Rotation handle" src="../images/greencircle.png" /> and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the <b>Shift</b> key while rotating.</p>
-			<hr />
+            <p class="note">
+                <b>Note</b>: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available <a href="../HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm#workwithobjects" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">here</a>.
+            </p>
+            <hr />
             <h3>Adjust autoshape settings</h3>
             <p id ="shape_rightclickmenu">To align and arrange autoshapes, use the <b>right-click menu</b>. The menu options are:</p>
 			<ul>
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm
index 2f7c21fff..d0a642f86 100644
--- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm
+++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm
@@ -171,7 +171,10 @@
             <h3>Move and resize charts</h3>
 			<p><img class="floatleft" alt="Moving chart" src="../images/moving_chart.png" />Once the chart is added, you can change its size and position. To change the chart size, drag small squares <img alt="Square icon" src="../images/resize_square.png" /> situated on its edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected chart while resizing, hold down the <b>Shift</b> key and drag one of the corner icons.</p>
 			<p>To alter the chart position, use the <img alt="Arrow" src="../images/arrow.png" /> icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the chart. Drag the chart to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the chart, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected).</p>
-			<hr />
+            <p class="note">
+                <b>Note</b>: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available <a href="../HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm#workwithobjects" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">here</a>.
+            </p>
+            <hr />
             <h3>Edit chart elements</h3>
             <p>To edit the chart <b>Title</b>, select the default text with the mouse and type in your own one instead.</p>
             <p>To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use icons at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar to change the font <a href="../UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">type, size, color</a> or its <a href="../UsageInstructions/DecorationStyles.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">decoration style</a>.</p>
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm
index cd94821fd..fae84f69b 100644
--- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm
+++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm
@@ -34,13 +34,16 @@
 			<p>To alter the image position, use the <img alt="Arrow" src="../images/arrow.png" /> icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the image. Drag the image to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button.</p>
 			<p>When you move the image, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected).</p>
 			<p>To rotate the image, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle <img alt="Rotation handle" src="../images/greencircle.png" /> and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the <b>Shift</b> key while rotating.</p>
-			<hr />
+            <p class="note">
+                <b>Note</b>: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available <a href="../HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm#workwithobjects" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">here</a>.
+            </p>
+            <hr />
             <h3>Adjust image settings</h3>
 			<p><img class="floatleft" alt="Image Settings tab" src="../images/right_image.png" />Some of the image settings can be altered using the <b>Image settings</b> tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the image and choose the <b>Image settings</b> <img alt="Image settings icon" src="../images/image_settings_icon.png" /> icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties:</p>
 			<ul style="margin-left: 280px;">
 				<li><b>Size</b> is used to view the current image <b>Width</b> and <b>Height</b>. If necessary, you can restore the default image size clicking the <b>Default Size</b> button. The <b>Fit to Margin</b> button allows to resize the image, so that it occupies all the space between the left and right page margin.</li>
 				<li><b>Wrapping Style</b> is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below).</li>
-				<li><b>Replace Image</b> is used to replace the current image loading another one from file or URL.</li>
+				<li><b>Replace Image</b> is used to replace the current image loading another one <b>From File</b> or <b>From URL</b>.</li>
 			</ul>
             <p>Some of these options you can also find in the <b>right-click menu</b>. The menu options are:</p>
 			<ul style="margin-left: 280px;">
@@ -49,11 +52,12 @@
 				<li><b>Align</b> is used to align the image left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to <a href="../UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">this page</a>.</li>
 				<li><b>Wrapping Style</b> is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The <b>Edit Wrap Boundary</b> option is available only if you select a wrapping style other than Inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. <img alt="Editing Wrap Boundary" src="../images/wrap_boundary.png" /></li>
 				<li><b>Default Size</b> is used to change the current image size to the default one.</li>
+                <li><b>Replace image</b> is used to replace the current image loading another one <b>From File</b> or <b>From URL</b>.</li>
 				<li><b>Image Advanced Settings</b> is used to open the 'Image - Advanced Settings' window.</li>
 			</ul>
             <p><img class="floatleft" alt="Shape Settings tab" src="../images/right_image_shape.png" /> When the image is selected, the <b>Shape settings</b> <img alt="Shape settings icon" src="../images/shape_settings_icon.png" /> icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the <b>Shape settings</b> tab at the right sidebar and adjust the shape <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm#shape_stroke" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)"><b>Stroke</b></a> type, size and color as well as change the shape type selecting another shape from the <b>Change Autoshape</b> menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly.</p>
 			<hr />
-			<p>To change its advanced settings, click the image with the right mouse button and select the <b>Image Advanced Settings</b> option from the right-click menu or just click the <b>Show advanced settings</b> link at the right sidebar. The image properties window will open:</p>
+			<p>To change the image advanced settings, click the image with the right mouse button and select the <b>Image Advanced Settings</b> option from the right-click menu or just click the <b>Show advanced settings</b> link at the right sidebar. The image properties window will open:</p>
 			<p><img alt="Image - Advanced Settings: Size" src="../images/image_properties.png" /></p>
 			<p>The <b>Size</b> tab contains the following parameters:</p>
 			<ul>
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm
index c930aa247..9200aa93e 100644
--- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm
+++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm
@@ -22,7 +22,11 @@
 				<li>select one of the following options:
 					<ul>
 						<li>To put a page number to each page of your document, select the page number position on the page.</li>
-						<li>To insert a page number at the current cursor position, select the <b>To Current Position</b> option.</li>
+						<li>To insert a page number at the current cursor position, select the <b>To Current Position</b> option.
+                            <p class="note">
+                                <b>Note</b>: to insert a current page number at the current cursor position you can also use the <em>Ctrl+Shift+P</em> key combination.
+                            </p>
+                        </li>
 					</ul>
 				</li>
 			</ol>
@@ -42,9 +46,15 @@
 				<li>Set the <b>Position</b> of page numbers on the page as well as relative to the top and bottom of the page.</li>
 				<li>Check the <b>Different first page</b> box to apply a different page number to the very first page or in case you don't want to add any number to it at all. </li>
 				<li>Use the <b>Different odd and even pages</b> box to insert different page numbers for odd and even pages. </li>
-				<li>The <b>Link to Previous</b> option is available in case you've previously added <a href="../UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">sections</a> into your document. If not, it will be grayed out. Moreover, this option is also unavailable for the very first section (i.e. when a header or footer that belongs to the first section is selected). By default, this box is checked, so that unified numbering is applied to all the sections. If you select a header or footer area, you will see that the area is marked with the <b>Same as Previous</b> label. Uncheck the <b>Link to Previous</b> box to use different page numbering for each section of the document. The <b>Same as Previous</b> label will no longer be displayed.</li>
+				<li>The <b>Link to Previous</b> option is available in case you've previously added <a href="../UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">sections</a> into your document. 
+                    If not, it will be grayed out. Moreover, this option is also unavailable for the very first section (i.e. when a header or footer that belongs to the first section is selected). 
+                    By default, this box is checked, so that unified numbering is applied to all the sections. If you select a header or footer area, you will see that the area is marked with the <b>Same as Previous</b> label. 
+                    Uncheck the <b>Link to Previous</b> box to use different page numbering for each section of the document. The <b>Same as Previous</b> label will no longer be displayed.
+                    <p><img alt="Same as previous label" src="../images/sameasprevious_label.png" /></p></li>
+                <li>The <b>Page Numbering</b> section allows to adjust page numbering options across different <a href="../UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">sections</a> of the document. 
+                    The <b>Continue from previous section</b> option is selected by default and allows to keep continuous page numbering after a section break. 
+                    If you want to start page numbering with a specific number in the current section of the document, select the <b>Start at</b> radio button and enter the necessary starting value in the field on the right. </li>
 				</ul>
-				<p><img alt="Same as previous label" src="../images/sameasprevious_label.png" /></p>
 				</li>
 			</ol>
 			<p>To return to the document editing, double-click within the working area.</p>
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm
index 642fbd059..8f7624983 100644
--- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm
+++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm
@@ -43,6 +43,9 @@
             <p>To select a certain row, move the mouse cursor to the left border of the table next to the necessary row so that the cursor turns into the horizontal black arrow <img alt="Select row" src="../images/selectrowpointer.png" />, then left-click.</p>
             <p>To select a certain column, move the mouse cursor to the top border of the necessary column so that the cursor turns into the downward black arrow <img alt="Select column" src="../images/selectcolumnpointer.png" />, then left-click.</p>
             <p>It's also possible to select a cell, row, column or table using options from the contextual menu or from the <b>Rows & Columns</b> section at the right sidebar.</p>
+            <p class="note">
+                <b>Note</b>: to move around in a table you can use <a href="../HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm#workwithtables" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">keyboard shortcuts</a>.
+            </p>
             <hr />
             <h3>Adjust table settings</h3>
 			<p>Some of the table properties as well as its structure can be altered using the right-click menu. The menu options are:</p>
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm
index 2430f69e1..a57a3793d 100644
--- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm
+++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
         </div>
 			<h1>Show/hide nonprinting characters</h1>
 			<p>Nonprinting characters help you edit a document. They indicate the presence of various types of formatting, but they do not print with the document, even when they are displayed on the screen.</p>
-			<p>To show or hide nonprinting characters, click the <b>Nonprinting characters</b> <img alt="Nonprinting characters" src="../images/nonprintingcharacters.png" /> icon at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar.</p>
+			<p>To show or hide nonprinting characters, click the <b>Nonprinting characters</b> <img alt="Nonprinting characters" src="../images/nonprintingcharacters.png" /> icon at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar. Alternatively, you can use the <em>Ctrl+Shift+Num8</em> key combination.</p>
 			<p>Nonprinting characters include:</p>
 			<table>
 				<tr>
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm
index 359ec1500..40258c732 100644
--- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm
+++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
         </div>
 			<h1>Insert page breaks</h1>
 			<p>In Document Editor, you can add the page break to start a new page and adjust pagination options.</p>
-			<p>To insert a page break at the current cursor position click the <img alt="Breaks icon" src="../images/pagebreak1.png" /> <b>Breaks</b> icon at the <b>Insert</b> or <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar or click the arrow next to this icon and select the <b>Insert Page Break</b> option from the menu.</p>
+			<p>To insert a page break at the current cursor position click the <img alt="Breaks icon" src="../images/pagebreak1.png" /> <b>Breaks</b> icon at the <b>Insert</b> or <b>Layout</b> tab of the top toolbar or click the arrow next to this icon and select the <b>Insert Page Break</b> option from the menu. You can also use the <b>Ctrl+Enter</b> key combination.</p>
 			<p>To insert a page break before the selected paragraph i.e. to start this paragraph at the top of a new page:</p>
 			<ul>
 				<li>click the right mouse button and select the <b>Page break before</b> option in the menu, or</li>
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm
index d4004f923..e28115e3e 100644
--- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm
+++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
 			<ol>
 				<li>click the <b>File</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
 				<li>select the <b>Download as...</b> option,</li>
-				<li>choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: PDF, TXT, DOCX, ODT, HTML.</li>
+				<li>choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, PDF, TXT, ODT, RTF, HTML.</li>
 			</ol>
 			</div>
 			<p>To print out the current document,</p>
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/access_rights.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/access_rights.png
index ce5b842a5..cc9312668 100644
Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/access_rights.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/access_rights.png differ
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/customstylemenu.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/customstylemenu.png
index 4b787600f..90405fcfb 100644
Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/customstylemenu.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/customstylemenu.png differ
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editedstylemenu.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editedstylemenu.png
index 6103f723a..b30d9ef29 100644
Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editedstylemenu.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/editedstylemenu.png differ
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/formattingpresets.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/formattingpresets.png
index ab5e1ac86..413f07a56 100644
Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/formattingpresets.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/formattingpresets.png differ
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/gotodocuments.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/gotodocuments.png
index 47ca61780..df560f316 100644
Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/gotodocuments.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/gotodocuments.png differ
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/hyperlinkwindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/hyperlinkwindow.png
index 1574ee9dc..73016ac4f 100644
Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/hyperlinkwindow.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/hyperlinkwindow.png differ
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png
index 7efa0223e..9e7328afd 100644
Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png differ
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png
index bae9464fa..508c9d049 100644
Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png differ
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png
index ab558a390..5bf5ce0fd 100644
Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png differ
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png
index 62895baa0..774cce80b 100644
Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png differ
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/layouttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/layouttab.png
index 9765b65a2..ca5385ffa 100644
Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/layouttab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/layouttab.png differ
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png
index 0f5b71c96..b9ca2f453 100644
Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png differ
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/referencestab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/referencestab.png
index 9961eac75..2e99653f6 100644
Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/referencestab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/referencestab.png differ
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/reviewtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/reviewtab.png
index 091aa1aba..31962e1ce 100644
Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/reviewtab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/reviewtab.png differ
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/rightpart.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/rightpart.png
index 72b82e092..95b0c8a72 100644
Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/rightpart.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/rightpart.png differ
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_headerfooter.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_headerfooter.png
index 61d5314df..298131647 100644
Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_headerfooter.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_headerfooter.png differ
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/usersnumber.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/usersnumber.png
index 14864e50f..1f1cee612 100644
Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/usersnumber.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/usersnumber.png differ
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/viewsettingsicon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/viewsettingsicon.png
index ff2feb799..02a46ce28 100644
Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/viewsettingsicon.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/viewsettingsicon.png differ
diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js
index e38d45773..cd726dd8f 100644
--- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js
+++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js
@@ -3,12 +3,12 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "HelpfulHints/About.htm", 
         "title": "About Document Editor", 
-        "body": "Document Editor is an online application that lets you look through and edit documents directly in your browser . Using Document Editor, you can perform various editing operations like in any desktop editor, print the edited documents keeping all the formatting details or download them onto your computer hard disk drive as PDF, TXT, DOCX, ODT, or HTML files. To view the current software version and licensor details, click the icon at the left sidebar."
+        "body": "Document Editor is an online application that lets you look through and edit documents directly in your browser . Using Document Editor, you can perform various editing operations like in any desktop editor, print the edited documents keeping all the formatting details or download them onto your computer hard disk drive as DOCX, PDF, TXT, ODT, RTF, or HTML files. To view the current software version and licensor details, click the icon at the left sidebar."
     },
    {
         "id": "HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm", 
         "title": "Advanced Settings of Document Editor", 
-        "body": "Document Editor lets you change its advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab at the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings... option. You can also use the icon in the right upper corner at the Home tab of the top toolbar. The advanced settings are: Commenting Display is used to turn on/off the live commenting option: Turn on display of the comments - if you disable this feature, the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the Comments icon at the left sidebar. Turn on display of the resolved comments - if you disable this feature, the resolved comments will be hidden in the document text. You'll be able to view such comments only if you click the Comments icon at the left sidebar. Spell Checking is used to turn on/off the spell checking option. Alternate Input is used to turn on/off hieroglyphs. Alignment Guides is used to turn on/off alignment guides that appear when you move objects and allow you to position them on the page precisely. Autosave is used to turn on/off automatic saving of changes you make while editing. Co-editing Mode is used to select the display of the changes made during the co-editing: By default the Fast mode is selected, the users who take part in the document co-editing will see the changes in realtime once they are made by other users. If you prefer not to see other user changes (so that they do not disturb you, or for some other reason), select the Strict mode and all the changes will be shown only after you click the Save icon notifying you that there are changes from other users. Realtime Collaboration Changes is used to specify what changes you want to be highlighted during co-editing: Selecting the View None option, changes made during the current session will not be highlighted. Selecting the View All option, all the changes made during the current session will be highlighted. Selecting the View Last option, only the changes made since you last time clicked the Save icon will be highlighted. This option is only available when the Strict co-editing mode is selected. Default Zoom Value is used to set the default zoom value selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 200%. You can also choose the Fit to Page or Fit to Width option. Font Hinting is used to select the type a font is displayed in Document Editor: Choose As Windows if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on Windows, i.e. using Windows font hinting. Choose As OS X if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on a Mac, i.e. without any font hinting at all. Choose Native if you want your text to be displayed with the hinting embedded into font files. Unit of Measurement is used to specify what units are used on the rulers and in properties windows for measuring elements parameters such as width, height, spacing, margins etc. You can select the Centimeter, Point, or Inch option. To save the changes you made, click the Apply button."
+        "body": "Document Editor lets you change its advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab at the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings... option. You can also click the View settings icon on the right side of the editor header and select the Advanced settings option. The advanced settings are: Commenting Display is used to turn on/off the live commenting option: Turn on display of the comments - if you disable this feature, the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the Comments icon at the left sidebar. Turn on display of the resolved comments - this feature is disabled by default so that the resolved comments were hidden in the document text. You can view such comments only if you click the Comments icon at the left sidebar. Enable this option if you want to display resolved comments in the document text. Spell Checking is used to turn on/off the spell checking option. Alternate Input is used to turn on/off hieroglyphs. Alignment Guides is used to turn on/off alignment guides that appear when you move objects and allow you to position them on the page precisely. Autosave is used to turn on/off automatic saving of changes you make while editing. Co-editing Mode is used to select the display of the changes made during the co-editing: By default the Fast mode is selected, the users who take part in the document co-editing will see the changes in realtime once they are made by other users. If you prefer not to see other user changes (so that they do not disturb you, or for some other reason), select the Strict mode and all the changes will be shown only after you click the Save icon notifying you that there are changes from other users. Realtime Collaboration Changes is used to specify what changes you want to be highlighted during co-editing: Selecting the View None option, changes made during the current session will not be highlighted. Selecting the View All option, all the changes made during the current session will be highlighted. Selecting the View Last option, only the changes made since you last time clicked the Save icon will be highlighted. This option is only available when the Strict co-editing mode is selected. Default Zoom Value is used to set the default zoom value selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 200%. You can also choose the Fit to Page or Fit to Width option. Font Hinting is used to select the type a font is displayed in Document Editor: Choose As Windows if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on Windows, i.e. using Windows font hinting. Choose As OS X if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on a Mac, i.e. without any font hinting at all. Choose Native if you want your text to be displayed with the hinting embedded into font files. Unit of Measurement is used to specify what units are used on the rulers and in properties windows for measuring elements parameters such as width, height, spacing, margins etc. You can select the Centimeter, Point, or Inch option. To save the changes you made, click the Apply button."
     },
    {
         "id": "HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm", 
@@ -18,12 +18,12 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm", 
         "title": "Keyboard Shortcuts", 
-        "body": "Working with Document Open 'File' panel Alt+F Open the File panel to save, download, print the current document, view its info, create a new document or open an existing one, access Document Editor help or advanced settings. Open 'Search' panel Ctrl+F Open the Search panel to start searching for a character/word/phrase in the currently edited document. Open 'Comments' panel Ctrl+Shift+H Open the Comments panel to add your own comment or reply to other users' comments. Open comment field Alt+H Open a data entry field where you can add the text of your comment. Open 'Chat' panel Alt+Q Open the Chat panel and send a message. Save document Ctrl+S Save all the changes to the document currently edited with Document Editor. Print document Ctrl+P Print the document with one of the available printers or save it to a file. Download As... Ctrl+Shift+S Save the currently edited document to the computer hard disk drive in one of the supported formats: PDF, TXT, DOCX, ODT, HTML. Full screen F11 Switch to the full screen view to fit Document Editor into your screen. Help menu F1 Open Document Editor Help menu. Navigation Jump to the beginning of the line Home Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited line. Jump to the beginning of the document Ctrl+Home Put the cursor to the very beginning of the currently edited document. Jump to the end of the line End Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited line. Jump to the end of the document Ctrl+End Put the cursor to the very end of the currently edited document. Scroll down PgDn Scroll the document approximately one visible page down. Scroll up PgUp Scroll the document approximately one visible page up. Next page Alt+PgDn Go to the next page in the currently edited document. Previous page Alt+PgUp Go to the previous page in the currently edited document. Zoom In Ctrl+plus (+) Zoom in the currently edited document. Zoom Out Ctrl+minus (-) Zoom out the currently edited document. Writing End paragraph Enter End the current paragraph and start a new one. Add line break Shift+Enter Add a line break without starting a new paragraph. Delete Backspace, Delete Delete one character to the left (Backspace) or to the right (Delete) of the cursor. Create nonbreaking space Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar Create a space between characters which cannot be used to start a new line. Create nonbreaking hyphen Ctrl+Shift+Hyphen Create a hyphen between characters which cannot be used to start a new line. Undo and Redo Undo Ctrl+Z Reverse the latest performed action. Redo Ctrl+Y Repeat the latest undone action. Cut, Copy, and Paste Cut Ctrl+X, Shift+Delete Delete the selected text fragment and send it to the computer clipboard memory. The copied text can be later inserted to another place in the same document, into another document, or into some other program. Copy Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert Send the selected text fragment to the computer clipboard memory. The copied text can be later inserted to another place in the same document, into another document, or into some other program. Paste Ctrl+V, Shift+Insert Insert the previously copied text fragment from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The text can be previously copied from the same document, from another document, or from some other program. Insert hyperlink Ctrl+K Insert a hyperlink which can be used to go to a web address. Copy style Ctrl+Shift+C Copy the formatting from the selected fragment of the currently edited text. The copied formatting can be later applied to another text fragment in the same document. Apply style Ctrl+Shift+V Apply the previously copied formatting to the text in the currently edited document. Text Selection Select all Ctrl+A Select all the document text with tables and images. Select fragment Shift+Arrow Select the text character by character. Select from cursor to beginning of line Shift+Home Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the current line. Select from cursor to end of line Shift+End Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the current line. Text Styling Bold Ctrl+B Make the font of the selected text fragment bold giving it more weight. Italic Ctrl+I Make the font of the selected text fragment italicized giving it some right side tilt. Underline Ctrl+U Make the selected text fragment underlined with the line going under the letters. Strikeout Ctrl+5 Make the selected text fragment struck out with the line going through the letters. Subscript Ctrl+dot (.) Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Superscript Ctrl+comma (,) Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Heading 1 style Alt+1 (for Windows and Linux browsers) Alt+Ctrl+1 (for Mac browsers) Apply the style of the heading 1 to the selected text fragment. Heading 2 style Alt+2 (for Windows and Linux browsers) Alt+Ctrl+2 (for Mac browsers) Apply the style of the heading 2 to the selected text fragment. Heading 3 style Alt+3 (for Windows and Linux browsers) Alt+Ctrl+3 (for Mac browsers) Apply the style of the heading 3 to the selected text fragment. Bulleted list Ctrl+Shift+L Create an unordered bulleted list from the selected text fragment or start a new one. Remove formatting Ctrl+Spacebar Remove formatting from the selected text fragment. Increase font Ctrl+] Increase the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Decrease font Ctrl+[ Decrease the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Align center/left Ctrl+E Switch a paragraph between centered and left-aligned. Align justified/left Ctrl+J, Ctrl+L Switch a paragraph between justified and left-aligned. Align right/left Ctrl+R Switch a paragraph between right-aligned and left-aligned. Increase indent Ctrl+M Indent a paragraph from the left incrementally. Decrease indent Ctrl+Shift+M Remove a paragraph indent from the left incrementally. Add page number Ctrl+Shift+P Add the current page number to the text or to the page footer. Nonprinting characters Ctrl+* Show or hide the display of nonprinting characters. Modifying Objects Constrain movement Shift+drag Constrain the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. Set 15-degree rotation Shift+drag (when rotating) Constrain the rotation angle to 15-degree increments. Maintain proportions Shift+drag (when resizing) Maintain the proportions of the selected object when resizing. Movement by one-pixel increments Ctrl Hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by one pixel at a time."
+        "body": "Working with Document Open 'File' panel Alt+F Open the File panel to save, download, print the current document, view its info, create a new document or open an existing one, access Document Editor help or advanced settings. Open 'Find and Replace' dialog box Ctrl+F Open the Find and Replace dialog box to start searching for a character/word/phrase in the currently edited document. Open 'Find and Replace' dialog box with replacement field Ctrl+H Open the Find and Replace dialog box with the replacement field to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters. Open 'Comments' panel Ctrl+Shift+H Open the Comments panel to add your own comment or reply to other users' comments. Open comment field Alt+H Open a data entry field where you can add the text of your comment. Open 'Chat' panel Alt+Q Open the Chat panel and send a message. Save document Ctrl+S Save all the changes to the document currently edited with Document Editor. The active file will be saved with its current file name, location, and file format. Print document Ctrl+P Print the document with one of the available printers or save it to a file. Download As... Ctrl+Shift+S Open the Download as... panel to save the currently edited document to the computer hard disk drive in one of the supported formats: DOCX, PDF, TXT, ODT, RTF, HTML. Full screen F11 Switch to the full screen view to fit Document Editor into your screen. Help menu F1 Open Document Editor Help menu. Open existing file Ctrl+O On the Open local file tab in desktop editors, opens the standard dialog box that allows to select an existing file. Element contextual menu Shift+F10 Open the selected element contextual menu. Close file Ctrl+W Close the selected document window. Close the window (tab) Ctrl+F4 Close the tab in a browser. Navigation Jump to the beginning of the line Home Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited line. Jump to the beginning of the document Ctrl+Home Put the cursor to the very beginning of the currently edited document. Jump to the end of the line End Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited line. Jump to the end of the document Ctrl+End Put the cursor to the very end of the currently edited document. Scroll down Page Down Scroll the document approximately one visible page down. Scroll up Page Up Scroll the document approximately one visible page up. Next page Alt+Page Down Go to the next page in the currently edited document. Previous page Alt+Page Up Go to the previous page in the currently edited document. Zoom In Ctrl+Plus sign (+) Zoom in the currently edited document. Zoom Out Ctrl+Minus sign (-) Zoom out the currently edited document. Move one character to the left Left arrow Move the cursor one character to the left. Move one character to the right Right arrow Move the cursor one character to the right. Move to the beginning of a word or one word to the left Ctrl+Left arrow Move the cursor to the beginning of a word or one word to the left. Move one word to the right Ctrl+Right arrow Move the cursor one word to the right. Move one line up Up arrow Move the cursor one line up. Move one line down Down arrow Move the cursor one line down. Writing End paragraph Enter End the current paragraph and start a new one. Add line break Shift+Enter Add a line break without starting a new paragraph. Delete Backspace, Delete Delete one character to the left (Backspace) or to the right (Delete) of the cursor. Create nonbreaking space Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar Create a space between characters which cannot be used to start a new line. Create nonbreaking hyphen Ctrl+Shift+Hyphen Create a hyphen between characters which cannot be used to start a new line. Undo and Redo Undo Ctrl+Z Reverse the latest performed action. Redo Ctrl+Y Repeat the latest undone action. Cut, Copy, and Paste Cut Ctrl+X, Shift+Delete Delete the selected text fragment and send it to the computer clipboard memory. The copied text can be later inserted to another place in the same document, into another document, or into some other program. Copy Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert Send the selected text fragment to the computer clipboard memory. The copied text can be later inserted to another place in the same document, into another document, or into some other program. Paste Ctrl+V, Shift+Insert Insert the previously copied text fragment from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The text can be previously copied from the same document, from another document, or from some other program. Insert hyperlink Ctrl+K Insert a hyperlink which can be used to go to a web address. Copy style Ctrl+Shift+C Copy the formatting from the selected fragment of the currently edited text. The copied formatting can be later applied to another text fragment in the same document. Apply style Ctrl+Shift+V Apply the previously copied formatting to the text in the currently edited document. Text Selection Select all Ctrl+A Select all the document text with tables and images. Select fragment Shift+Arrow Select the text character by character. Select from cursor to beginning of line Shift+Home Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the current line. Select from cursor to end of line Shift+End Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the current line. Select one character to the right Shift+Right arrow Select one character to the right of the cursor position. Select one character to the left Shift+Left arrow Select one character to the left of the cursor position. Select to the end of a word Ctrl+Shift+Right arrow Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of a word. Select to the beginning of a word Ctrl+Shift+Left arrow Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of a word. Select one line up Shift+Up arrow Select one line up (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Select one line down Shift+Down arrow Select one line down (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Text Styling Bold Ctrl+B Make the font of the selected text fragment bold giving it more weight. Italic Ctrl+I Make the font of the selected text fragment italicized giving it some right side tilt. Underline Ctrl+U Make the selected text fragment underlined with the line going under the letters. Strikeout Ctrl+5 Make the selected text fragment struck out with the line going through the letters. Subscript Ctrl+dot (.) Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Superscript Ctrl+comma (,) Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Heading 1 style Alt+1 (for Windows and Linux browsers) Alt+Ctrl+1 (for Mac browsers) Apply the style of the heading 1 to the selected text fragment. Heading 2 style Alt+2 (for Windows and Linux browsers) Alt+Ctrl+2 (for Mac browsers) Apply the style of the heading 2 to the selected text fragment. Heading 3 style Alt+3 (for Windows and Linux browsers) Alt+Ctrl+3 (for Mac browsers) Apply the style of the heading 3 to the selected text fragment. Bulleted list Ctrl+Shift+L Create an unordered bulleted list from the selected text fragment or start a new one. Remove formatting Ctrl+Spacebar Remove formatting from the selected text fragment. Increase font Ctrl+] Increase the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Decrease font Ctrl+[ Decrease the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Align center/left Ctrl+E Switch a paragraph between centered and left-aligned. Align justified/left Ctrl+J, Ctrl+L Switch a paragraph between justified and left-aligned. Align right/left Ctrl+R Switch a paragraph between right-aligned and left-aligned. Apply subscript formatting (automatic spacing) Ctrl+Equal sign (=) Apply subscript formatting to the selected text fragment. Apply superscript formatting (automatic spacing) Ctrl+Shift+Plus sign (+) Apply superscript formatting to the selected text fragment. Insert page break Ctrl+Enter Insert a page break at the current cursor position. Increase indent Ctrl+M Indent a paragraph from the left incrementally. Decrease indent Ctrl+Shift+M Remove a paragraph indent from the left incrementally. Add page number Ctrl+Shift+P Add the current page number at the current cursor position. Nonprinting characters Ctrl+Shift+Num8 Show or hide the display of nonprinting characters. Delete one character to the left Backspace Delete one character to the left of the cursor. Delete one character to the right Delete Delete one character to the right of the cursor. Modifying Objects Constrain movement Shift+drag Constrain the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. Set 15-degree rotation Shift+drag (when rotating) Constrain the rotation angle to 15-degree increments. Maintain proportions Shift+drag (when resizing) Maintain the proportions of the selected object when resizing. Draw straight line or arrow Shift+drag (when drawing lines/arrows) Draw a straight vertical/horizontal/45-degree line or arrow. Movement by one-pixel increments Ctrl+Arrow keys Hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by one pixel at a time. Working with Tables Move to the next cell in a row Tab Go to the next cell in a table row. Move to the previous cell in a row Shift+Tab Go to the previous cell in a table row. Move to the next row Down arrow Go to the next row in a table. Move to the previous row Up arrow Go to the previous row in a table. Start new paragraph Enter Start a new paragraph within a cell. Add new row Tab in the lower right table cell. Add a new row at the bottom of the table. Inserting special characters Insert formula Alt+Equal sign (=) Insert a formula at the current cursor position."
     },
    {
         "id": "HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm", 
         "title": "View Settings and Navigation Tools", 
-        "body": "Document Editor offers several tools to help you view and navigate through your document: zoom, page number indicator etc. Adjust the View Settings To adjust default view settings and set the most convenient mode to work with the document, switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, click the View settings icon at the upper right corner and select which interface elements you want to be hidden or shown. You can select the following options from the View settings drop-down list: Hide Toolbar - hides the top toolbar that contains commands while tabs remain visible. When this option is enabled, you can click any tab to display the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed until you click anywhere outside it. To disable this mode switch to the Home tab, then click the View settings icon and click the Hide Toolbar option once again. The top toolbar will be displayed all the time. Note: alternatively, you can just double-click any tab to hide the top toolbar or display it again. Hide Status Bar - hides the bottommost bar where the Page Number Indicator and Zoom buttons are situated. To show the hidden Status Bar click this option once again. Hide Rulers - hides rulers which are used to align text, graphics, tables, and other elements in a document, set up margins, tab stops, and paragraph indents. To show the hidden Rulers click this option once again. The right sidebar is minimized by default. To expand it, select any object (e.g. image, chart, shape) or text passage and click the icon of the currently activated tab on the right. To minimize the right sidebar, click the icon once again. When the Comments or Chat panel is opened, the left sidebar width is adjusted by simple drag-and-drop: move the mouse cursor over the left sidebar border so that it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the right to extend the sidebar width. To restore its original width move the border to the left. Use the Navigation Tools To navigate through your document, use the following tools: The Zoom buttons are situated in the right lower corner and are used to zoom in and out the current document. To change the currently selected zoom value that is displayed in percent, click it and select one of the available zoom options from the list or use the Zoom in or Zoom out buttons. Click the Fit width icon to fit the document page width to the visible part of the working area. To fit the whole document page to the visible part of the working area, click the Fit page icon. Zoom settings are also available in the View settings drop-down list that can be useful if you decide to hide the Status Bar. The Page Number Indicator shows the current page as a part of all the pages in the current document (page 'n' of 'nn'). Click this caption to open the window where you can enter the page number and quickly go to it."
+        "body": "Document Editor offers several tools to help you view and navigate through your document: zoom, page number indicator etc. Adjust the View Settings To adjust default view settings and set the most convenient mode to work with the document, click the View settings icon on the right side of the editor header and select which interface elements you want to be hidden or shown. You can select the following options from the View settings drop-down list: Hide Toolbar - hides the top toolbar that contains commands while tabs remain visible. When this option is enabled, you can click any tab to display the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed until you click anywhere outside it. To disable this mode, click the View settings icon and click the Hide Toolbar option once again. The top toolbar will be displayed all the time. Note: alternatively, you can just double-click any tab to hide the top toolbar or display it again. Hide Status Bar - hides the bottommost bar where the Page Number Indicator and Zoom buttons are situated. To show the hidden Status Bar click this option once again. Hide Rulers - hides rulers which are used to align text, graphics, tables, and other elements in a document, set up margins, tab stops, and paragraph indents. To show the hidden Rulers click this option once again. The right sidebar is minimized by default. To expand it, select any object (e.g. image, chart, shape) or text passage and click the icon of the currently activated tab on the right. To minimize the right sidebar, click the icon once again. When the Comments or Chat panel is opened, the left sidebar width is adjusted by simple drag-and-drop: move the mouse cursor over the left sidebar border so that it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the right to extend the sidebar width. To restore its original width move the border to the left. Use the Navigation Tools To navigate through your document, use the following tools: The Zoom buttons are situated in the right lower corner and are used to zoom in and out the current document. To change the currently selected zoom value that is displayed in percent, click it and select one of the available zoom options from the list or use the Zoom in or Zoom out buttons. Click the Fit width icon to fit the document page width to the visible part of the working area. To fit the whole document page to the visible part of the working area, click the Fit page icon. Zoom settings are also available in the View settings drop-down list that can be useful if you decide to hide the Status Bar. The Page Number Indicator shows the current page as a part of all the pages in the current document (page 'n' of 'nn'). Click this caption to open the window where you can enter the page number and quickly go to it."
     },
    {
         "id": "HelpfulHints/Review.htm", 
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "HelpfulHints/Search.htm", 
         "title": "Search and Replace Function", 
-        "body": "To search for the needed characters, words or phrases used in the currently edited document, click the icon situated at the left sidebar. The Find and Replace window will open: Type in your inquiry into the corresponding data entry field. Specify search parameters by clicking the icon and checking the necessary options: Case sensitive - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is 'Editor' and this option is selected, such words as 'editor' or 'EDITOR' etc. will not be found). To disable this option click it once again. Highlight results - is used to highlight all found occurrences at once. To disable this option and remove the highlight click the option once again. Click one of the arrow buttons at the bottom right corner of the window. The search will be performed either towards the beginning of the document (if you click the button) or towards the end of the document (if you click the button) from the current position. Note: when the Highlight results option is enabled, use these buttons to navigate through the highlighted results. The first occurrence of the required characters in the selected direction will be highlighted on the page. If it is not the word you are looking for, click the selected button again to find the next occurrence of the characters you entered. To replace one or more occurrences of the found characters click the Replace link below the data entry field. The Find and Replace window will change: Type in the replacement text into the bottom data entry field. Click the Replace button to replace the currently selected occurrence or the Replace All button to replace all the found occurrences. To hide the replace field, click the Hide Replace link."
+        "body": "To search for the needed characters, words or phrases used in the currently edited document, click the icon situated at the left sidebar or use the Ctrl+F key combination. The Find and Replace window will open: Type in your inquiry into the corresponding data entry field. Specify search parameters by clicking the icon and checking the necessary options: Case sensitive - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is 'Editor' and this option is selected, such words as 'editor' or 'EDITOR' etc. will not be found). To disable this option click it once again. Highlight results - is used to highlight all found occurrences at once. To disable this option and remove the highlight click the option once again. Click one of the arrow buttons at the bottom right corner of the window. The search will be performed either towards the beginning of the document (if you click the button) or towards the end of the document (if you click the button) from the current position. Note: when the Highlight results option is enabled, use these buttons to navigate through the highlighted results. The first occurrence of the required characters in the selected direction will be highlighted on the page. If it is not the word you are looking for, click the selected button again to find the next occurrence of the characters you entered. To replace one or more occurrences of the found characters click the Replace link below the data entry field or use the Ctrl+H key combination. The Find and Replace window will change: Type in the replacement text into the bottom data entry field. Click the Replace button to replace the currently selected occurrence or the Replace All button to replace all the found occurrences. To hide the replace field, click the Hide Replace link."
     },
    {
         "id": "HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm", 
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm", 
         "title": "Supported Formats of Electronic Documents", 
-        "body": "Electronic documents represent one of the most commonly used computer files. Thanks to the computer network highly developed nowadays, it's possible and more convenient to distribute electronic documents than printed ones. Due to the variety of devices used for document presentation, there are a lot of proprietary and open file formats. Document Editor handles the most popular of them. Formats Description View Edit Download DOC Filename extension for word processing documents created with Microsoft Word + + DOCX Office Open XML Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for representing spreadsheets, charts, presentations, and word processing documents + + + ODT Word processing file format of OpenDocument, an open standard for electronic documents + + + RTF Rich Text Format Document file format developed by Microsoft for cross-platform document interchange + + TXT Filename extension for text files usually containing very little formatting + + + PDF Portable Document Format File format used to represent documents in a manner independent of application software, hardware, and operating systems + + HTML HyperText Markup Language The main markup language for web pages + EPUB Electronic Publication Free and open e-book standard created by the International Digital Publishing Forum + XPS Open XML Paper Specification Open royalty-free fixed-layout document format developed by Microsoft + DjVu File format designed primarily to store scanned documents, especially those containing a combination of text, line drawings, and photographs +"
+        "body": "Electronic documents represent one of the most commonly used computer files. Thanks to the computer network highly developed nowadays, it's possible and more convenient to distribute electronic documents than printed ones. Due to the variety of devices used for document presentation, there are a lot of proprietary and open file formats. Document Editor handles the most popular of them. Formats Description View Edit Download DOC Filename extension for word processing documents created with Microsoft Word + + DOCX Office Open XML Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for representing spreadsheets, charts, presentations, and word processing documents + + + ODT Word processing file format of OpenDocument, an open standard for electronic documents + + + RTF Rich Text Format Document file format developed by Microsoft for cross-platform document interchange + + + TXT Filename extension for text files usually containing very little formatting + + + PDF Portable Document Format File format used to represent documents in a manner independent of application software, hardware, and operating systems + + HTML HyperText Markup Language The main markup language for web pages + EPUB Electronic Publication Free and open e-book standard created by the International Digital Publishing Forum + XPS Open XML Paper Specification Open royalty-free fixed-layout document format developed by Microsoft + DjVu File format designed primarily to store scanned documents, especially those containing a combination of text, line drawings, and photographs +"
     },
    {
         "id": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", 
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm", 
         "title": "Home tab", 
-        "body": "The Home tab opens by default when you open a document. It allows to format font and paragraphs. Some other options are also available here, such as Mail Merge, color schemes, view settings. Using this tab, you can: adjust font type, size, color, apply font decoration styles, select background color for a paragraph, create bulleted and numbered lists, change paragraph indents, set paragraph line spacing, align your text in a paragraph, show/hide nonprinting characters, copy/clear text formatting, change color scheme, use Mail Merge, manage styles, adjust View Settings and access the editor Advanced Settings."
+        "body": "The Home tab opens by default when you open a document. It allows to format font and paragraphs. Some other options are also available here, such as Mail Merge and color schemes. Using this tab, you can: adjust font type, size, color, apply font decoration styles, select background color for a paragraph, create bulleted and numbered lists, change paragraph indents, set paragraph line spacing, align your text in a paragraph, show/hide nonprinting characters, copy/clear text formatting, change color scheme, use Mail Merge, manage styles."
     },
    {
         "id": "ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm", 
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", 
         "title": "Introducing the Document Editor user interface", 
-        "body": "Document Editor uses a tabbed interface where editing commands are grouped into tabs by functionality. The editor interface consists of the following main elements: Editor header displays the logo, menu tabs, document name as well as two icons on the right that allow to set access rights and return to the Documents list. Top toolbar displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: File, Home, Insert, Layout, References, Collaboration, Plugins. The Print, Save, Copy, Paste, Undo and Redo options are always available at the left part of the Top toolbar regardless of the selected tab. Status bar at the bottom of the editor window contains the page number indicator, displays some notifications (such as \"All changes saved\" etc.), allows to set text language, enable spell checking, turn on the track changes mode, adjust zoom. Left sidebar contains icons that allow to use the Search and Replace tool, open the Comments, Chat and Navigation panel, contact our support team and view the information about the program. Right sidebar allows to adjust additional parameters of different objects. When you select a particular object in the text, the corresponding icon is activated at the right sidebar. Click this icon to expand the right sidebar. Horizontal and vertical Rulers allow to align text and other elements in a document, set up margins, tab stops, and paragraph indents. Working area allows to view document content, enter and edit data. Scroll bar on the right allows to scroll up and down multi-page documents. For your convenience you can hide some components and display them again when it is necessary. To learn more on how to adjust view settings please refer to this page."
+        "body": "Document Editor uses a tabbed interface where editing commands are grouped into tabs by functionality. The editor interface consists of the following main elements: Editor header displays the logo, menu tabs, document name as well as three icons on the right that allow to set access rights, return to the Documents list, adjust View Settings and access the editor Advanced Settings. Top toolbar displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: File, Home, Insert, Layout, References, Collaboration, Plugins. The Print, Save, Copy, Paste, Undo and Redo options are always available at the left part of the Top toolbar regardless of the selected tab. Status bar at the bottom of the editor window contains the page number indicator, displays some notifications (such as \"All changes saved\" etc.), allows to set text language, enable spell checking, turn on the track changes mode, adjust zoom. Left sidebar contains icons that allow to use the Search and Replace tool, open the Comments, Chat and Navigation panel, contact our support team and view the information about the program. Right sidebar allows to adjust additional parameters of different objects. When you select a particular object in the text, the corresponding icon is activated at the right sidebar. Click this icon to expand the right sidebar. Horizontal and vertical Rulers allow to align text and other elements in a document, set up margins, tab stops, and paragraph indents. Working area allows to view document content, enter and edit data. Scroll bar on the right allows to scroll up and down multi-page documents. For your convenience you can hide some components and display them again when it is necessary. To learn more on how to adjust view settings please refer to this page."
     },
    {
         "id": "ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm", 
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm", 
         "title": "Add hyperlinks", 
-        "body": "To add a hyperlink, place the cursor to a position where a hyperlink will be added, switch to the Insert or References tab of the top toolbar, click the Hyperlink icon at the top toolbar, after that the Hyperlink Settings window will appear where you can specify the hyperlink parameters: Link to - enter a URL in the format http://www.example.com. Display - enter a text that will get clickable and lead to the web address specified in the upper field. ScreenTip text - enter a text that will become visible in a small pop-up window that provides a brief note or label pertaining to the hyperlink being pointed to. Click the OK button. To add a hyperlink, you can also click with the right mouse button at a position where a hyperlink will be added and select the Hyperlink option in the menu that opens the window displayed above. Note: it's also possible to select a caracter, word, word combination, text passage with the mouse or using the keyboard and click the Hyperlink icon at the Insert or References tab of the top toolbar or right-click the selection and choose the Hyperlink option in the menu. After that the window displayed above will open with the Display field filled with the text fragment you selected. By hovering the cursor over the added hyperlink, the ScreenTip will appear containing the text you specified. You can follow the link by pressing the CTRL key and clicking the link in your document. To edit or delete the added hyperlink, click it with the right mouse button, select the Hyperlink option and then the action you want to perform - Edit Hyperlink or Remove Hyperlink."
+        "body": "To add a hyperlink, place the cursor to a position where a hyperlink will be added, switch to the Insert or References tab of the top toolbar, click the Hyperlink icon at the top toolbar, after that the Hyperlink Settings window will appear where you can specify the hyperlink parameters: Link to - enter a URL in the format http://www.example.com. Display - enter a text that will get clickable and lead to the web address specified in the upper field. ScreenTip text - enter a text that will become visible in a small pop-up window that provides a brief note or label pertaining to the hyperlink being pointed to. Click the OK button. To add a hyperlink, you can also use the Ctrl+K key combination or click with the right mouse button at a position where a hyperlink will be added and select the Hyperlink option in the right-click menu. Note: it's also possible to select a character, word, word combination, text passage with the mouse or using the keyboard and then open the Hyperlink Settings window as described above. In this case, the Display field will be filled with the text fragment you selected. By hovering the cursor over the added hyperlink, the ScreenTip will appear containing the text you specified. You can follow the link by pressing the CTRL key and clicking the link in your document. To edit or delete the added hyperlink, click it with the right mouse button, select the Hyperlink option and then the action you want to perform - Edit Hyperlink or Remove Hyperlink."
     },
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm", 
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm", 
         "title": "Create lists", 
-        "body": "To create a list in your document, place the cursor to the position where a list will be started (this can be a new line or the already entered text), switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the list type you would like to start: Unordered list with markers is created using the Bullets icon situated at the top toolbar Ordered list with digits or letters is created using the Numbering icon situated at the top toolbar Note: click the downward arrow next to the Bullets or Numbering icon to select how the list is going to look like. now each time you press the Enter key at the end of the line a new ordered or unordered list item will appear. To stop that, press the Backspace key and continue with the common text paragraph. You can also change the text indentation in the lists and their nesting using the Outline , Decrease indent , and Increase indent icons at the Home tab of the top toolbar. Note: the additional indentation and spacing parameters can be changed at the right sidebar and in the advanced settings window. To learn more about it, read the Change paragraph indents and Set paragraph line spacing section."
+        "body": "To create a list in your document, place the cursor to the position where a list will be started (this can be a new line or the already entered text), switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the list type you would like to start: Unordered list with markers is created using the Bullets icon situated at the top toolbar Ordered list with digits or letters is created using the Numbering icon situated at the top toolbar Note: click the downward arrow next to the Bullets or Numbering icon to select how the list is going to look like. now each time you press the Enter key at the end of the line a new ordered or unordered list item will appear. To stop that, press the Backspace key and continue with the common text paragraph. You can also change the text indentation in the lists and their nesting using the Multilevel list , Decrease indent , and Increase indent icons at the Home tab of the top toolbar. Note: the additional indentation and spacing parameters can be changed at the right sidebar and in the advanced settings window. To learn more about it, read the Change paragraph indents and Set paragraph line spacing section."
     },
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/CreateTableOfContents.htm", 
@@ -153,17 +153,17 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm", 
         "title": "Apply formatting styles", 
-        "body": "Each formatting style is a set of predefined formatting options: (font size, color, line spacing, alignment etc.). The styles allow you to quickly format different parts of the document (headings, subheadings, lists, normal text, quotes) instead of applying several formatting options individually each time. This also ensures a consistent appearance throughout the entire document. A style can be applied to the whole paragraph only. Use default styles To apply one of the available text formatting styles, place the cursor within the paragraph you need, or select several paragraphs you want to apply one of the formatting styles to, select the needed style from the style gallery on the right at the Home tab of the top toolbar. The following formatting styles are available: normal, no spacing, heading 1-9, title, subtitle, quote, intense quote, list paragraph. Edit existing styles and create new ones To change an existing style: Apply the necessary style to a paragraph. Select the paragraph text and change all the formatting parameters you need. Save the changes made: right-click the edited text, select the Formatting as Style option and then choose the Update 'StyleName' Style option ('StyleName' corresponds to the style you've applied at the step 1), or select the edited text passage with the mouse, drop-down the style gallery, right-click the style you want to change and select the Update from selection option. Once the style is modified, all the paragraphs within the document formatted using this style will change their appearance correspondingly. To create a completely new style: Format a text passage as you need. Select an appropriate way to save the style: right-click the edited text, select the Formatting as Style option and then choose the Create new Style option, or select the edited text passage with the mouse, drop-down the style gallery and click the New style from selection option. Set the new style parameters in the Create New Style window that opens: Specify the new style name in the text entry field. Select the desired style for the subsequent paragraph from the Next paragraph style list. Click the OK button. The created style will be added to the style gallery. Manage your custom styles: To restore the default settings of a certain style you've changed, right-click the style you want to restore and select the Restore to default option. To restore the default settings of all the styles you've changed, right-click any default style in the style gallery and select the Restore all to default styles option. To delete one of the new styles you've created, right-click the style you want to delete and select the Delete style option. To delete all the new styles you've created, right-click any new style you've created and select the Delete all custom styles option."
+        "body": "Each formatting style is a set of predefined formatting options: (font size, color, line spacing, alignment etc.). The styles allow you to quickly format different parts of the document (headings, subheadings, lists, normal text, quotes) instead of applying several formatting options individually each time. This also ensures a consistent appearance throughout the entire document. A style can be applied to the whole paragraph only. Use default styles To apply one of the available text formatting styles, place the cursor within the paragraph you need, or select several paragraphs you want to apply one of the formatting styles to, select the needed style from the style gallery on the right at the Home tab of the top toolbar. The following formatting styles are available: normal, no spacing, heading 1-9, title, subtitle, quote, intense quote, list paragraph, footer, header, footnote text. Edit existing styles and create new ones To change an existing style: Apply the necessary style to a paragraph. Select the paragraph text and change all the formatting parameters you need. Save the changes made: right-click the edited text, select the Formatting as Style option and then choose the Update 'StyleName' Style option ('StyleName' corresponds to the style you've applied at the step 1), or select the edited text passage with the mouse, drop-down the style gallery, right-click the style you want to change and select the Update from selection option. Once the style is modified, all the paragraphs within the document formatted using this style will change their appearance correspondingly. To create a completely new style: Format a text passage as you need. Select an appropriate way to save the style: right-click the edited text, select the Formatting as Style option and then choose the Create new Style option, or select the edited text passage with the mouse, drop-down the style gallery and click the New style from selection option. Set the new style parameters in the Create New Style window that opens: Specify the new style name in the text entry field. Select the desired style for the subsequent paragraph from the Next paragraph style list. Click the OK button. The created style will be added to the style gallery. Manage your custom styles: To restore the default settings of a certain style you've changed, right-click the style you want to restore and select the Restore to default option. To restore the default settings of all the styles you've changed, right-click any default style in the style gallery and select the Restore all to default styles option. To delete one of the new styles you've created, right-click the style you want to delete and select the Delete style option. To delete all the new styles you've created, right-click any new style you've created and select the Delete all custom styles option."
     },
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm", 
         "title": "Insert autoshapes", 
-        "body": "Insert an autoshape To add an autoshape to your document, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Shape icon at the top toolbar, select one of the available autoshape groups: basic shapes, figured arrows, math, charts, stars &amp; ribbons, callouts, buttons, rectangles, lines, click the necessary autoshape within the selected group, place the mouse cursor where you want the shape to be put, once the autoshape is added you can change its size, position and properties. Note: to add a caption within the autoshape make sure the shape is selected on the page and start typing your text. The text you add in this way becomes a part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text moves or rotates with it). Move and resize autoshapes To change the autoshape size, drag small squares situated on the shape edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected autoshape while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons.</pid> When modifying some shapes, for example figured arrows or callouts, the yellow diamond-shaped icon is also available. It allows you to adjust some aspects of the shape, for example, the length of the head of an arrow. To alter the autoshape position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the autoshape. Drag the autoshape to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the autoshape, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected). To move the autoshape by one-pixel increments, hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows. To move the autoshape strictly horizontally/vertically and prevent it from moving in a perpendicular direction, hold down the Shift key when dragging. To rotate the autoshape, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating. Adjust autoshape settings To align and arrange autoshapes, use the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Arrange is used to bring the selected autoshape to foreground, send to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup shapes to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects you can refer to this page. Align is used to align the shape left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to this page. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if you select a wrapping style other than Inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. Shape Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window. Some of the autoshape settings can be altered using the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the shape and choose the Shape settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color you want to fill the inner space of the selected autoshape with. Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like: Gradient Fill - select this option to fill the shape with two colors which smoothly change from one to another. Style - choose one of the available options: Linear (colors change in a straight line i.e. along a horizontal/vertical axis or diagonally at a 45 degree angle) or Radial (colors change in a circular path from the center to the edges). Direction - choose a template from the menu. If the Linear gradient is selected, the following directions are available: top-left to bottom-right, top to bottom, top-right to bottom-left, right to left, bottom-right to top-left, bottom to top, bottom-left to top-right, left to right. If the Radial gradient is selected, only one template is available. Gradient - click on the left slider under the gradient bar to activate the color box which corresponds to the first color. Click on the color box on the right to choose the first color in the palette. Drag the slider to set the gradient stop i.e. the point where one color changes into another. Use the right slider under the gradient bar to specify the second color and set the gradient stop. Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background. If you wish to use an image as a background for the shape, you can add an image From File selecting it on your computer HDD or From URL inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window. If you wish to use a texture as a background for the shape, open the From Texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood. In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the autoshape has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the dropdown list. The Stretch option allows you to adjust the image size to fit the autoshape size so that it could fill the space completely. The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the autoshape surface so that it could fill the space completely. Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary. Pattern - select this option to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Opacity - use this section to set an Opacity level dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency. Stroke - use this section to change the autoshape stroke width, color or type. To change the stroke width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any stroke. To change the stroke color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. To change the stroke type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). Wrapping Style - use this section to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Change Autoshape - use this section to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list. To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, right-click it and select the Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width - use one of these options to change the autoshape width. Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab). Relative - specify a percentage relative to the left margin width, the margin (i.e. the distance between the left and right margins), the page width, or the right margin width. Height - use one of these options to change the autoshape height. Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab). Relative - specify a percentage relative to the margin (i.e. the distance between the top and bottom margins), the bottom margin height, the page height, or the top margin height. If the Lock aspect ratio option is checked, the width and height will be changed together preserving the original shape aspect ratio. The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the shape is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). Inline - the shape is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the shape moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the shape can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the shape. Tight - the text wraps the actual shape edges. Through - the text wraps around the shape edges and fills in the open white space within the shape. So that the effect can appear, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the shape. In front - the shape overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the shape. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom style you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if you select a wrapping style other than inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types: Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin. The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types: Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. Move object with text controls whether the autoshape moves as the text to which it is anchored moves. Allow overlap controls whether two autoshapes overlap or not if you drag them near each other on the page. The Shape Settings tab contains the following parameters: Line Style - this option group allows to specify the following parameters: Cap Type - this option allows to set the style for the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with the open outline, such as lines, polylines etc.: Flat - the end points will be flat. Round - the end points will be rounded. Square - the end points will be square. Join Type - this option allows to set the style for the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of the triangle or rectangle outline: Round - the corner will be rounded. Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly. Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles. Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width. Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows to set the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the dropdown lists. The Text Padding tab allows to change the autoshape Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins (i.e. the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders). Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled. The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the shape."
+        "body": "Insert an autoshape To add an autoshape to your document, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Shape icon at the top toolbar, select one of the available autoshape groups: basic shapes, figured arrows, math, charts, stars &amp; ribbons, callouts, buttons, rectangles, lines, click the necessary autoshape within the selected group, place the mouse cursor where you want the shape to be put, once the autoshape is added you can change its size, position and properties. Note: to add a caption within the autoshape make sure the shape is selected on the page and start typing your text. The text you add in this way becomes a part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text moves or rotates with it). Move and resize autoshapes To change the autoshape size, drag small squares situated on the shape edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected autoshape while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons.</pid> When modifying some shapes, for example figured arrows or callouts, the yellow diamond-shaped icon is also available. It allows you to adjust some aspects of the shape, for example, the length of the head of an arrow. To alter the autoshape position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the autoshape. Drag the autoshape to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the autoshape, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected). To move the autoshape by one-pixel increments, hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows. To move the autoshape strictly horizontally/vertically and prevent it from moving in a perpendicular direction, hold down the Shift key when dragging. To rotate the autoshape, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating. Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. Adjust autoshape settings To align and arrange autoshapes, use the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Arrange is used to bring the selected autoshape to foreground, send to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup shapes to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects you can refer to this page. Align is used to align the shape left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to this page. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if you select a wrapping style other than Inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. Shape Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window. Some of the autoshape settings can be altered using the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the shape and choose the Shape settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color you want to fill the inner space of the selected autoshape with. Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like: Gradient Fill - select this option to fill the shape with two colors which smoothly change from one to another. Style - choose one of the available options: Linear (colors change in a straight line i.e. along a horizontal/vertical axis or diagonally at a 45 degree angle) or Radial (colors change in a circular path from the center to the edges). Direction - choose a template from the menu. If the Linear gradient is selected, the following directions are available: top-left to bottom-right, top to bottom, top-right to bottom-left, right to left, bottom-right to top-left, bottom to top, bottom-left to top-right, left to right. If the Radial gradient is selected, only one template is available. Gradient - click on the left slider under the gradient bar to activate the color box which corresponds to the first color. Click on the color box on the right to choose the first color in the palette. Drag the slider to set the gradient stop i.e. the point where one color changes into another. Use the right slider under the gradient bar to specify the second color and set the gradient stop. Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background. If you wish to use an image as a background for the shape, you can add an image From File selecting it on your computer HDD or From URL inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window. If you wish to use a texture as a background for the shape, open the From Texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood. In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the autoshape has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the dropdown list. The Stretch option allows you to adjust the image size to fit the autoshape size so that it could fill the space completely. The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the autoshape surface so that it could fill the space completely. Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary. Pattern - select this option to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Opacity - use this section to set an Opacity level dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency. Stroke - use this section to change the autoshape stroke width, color or type. To change the stroke width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any stroke. To change the stroke color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. To change the stroke type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). Wrapping Style - use this section to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Change Autoshape - use this section to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list. To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, right-click it and select the Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width - use one of these options to change the autoshape width. Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab). Relative - specify a percentage relative to the left margin width, the margin (i.e. the distance between the left and right margins), the page width, or the right margin width. Height - use one of these options to change the autoshape height. Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab). Relative - specify a percentage relative to the margin (i.e. the distance between the top and bottom margins), the bottom margin height, the page height, or the top margin height. If the Lock aspect ratio option is checked, the width and height will be changed together preserving the original shape aspect ratio. The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the shape is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). Inline - the shape is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the shape moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the shape can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the shape. Tight - the text wraps the actual shape edges. Through - the text wraps around the shape edges and fills in the open white space within the shape. So that the effect can appear, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the shape. In front - the shape overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the shape. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom style you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if you select a wrapping style other than inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types: Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin. The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types: Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. Move object with text controls whether the autoshape moves as the text to which it is anchored moves. Allow overlap controls whether two autoshapes overlap or not if you drag them near each other on the page. The Shape Settings tab contains the following parameters: Line Style - this option group allows to specify the following parameters: Cap Type - this option allows to set the style for the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with the open outline, such as lines, polylines etc.: Flat - the end points will be flat. Round - the end points will be rounded. Square - the end points will be square. Join Type - this option allows to set the style for the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of the triangle or rectangle outline: Round - the corner will be rounded. Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly. Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles. Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width. Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows to set the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the dropdown lists. The Text Padding tab allows to change the autoshape Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins (i.e. the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders). Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled. The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the shape."
     },
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm", 
         "title": "Insert charts", 
-        "body": "Insert a chart To insert a chart into your document, put the cursor at the place where you want to add a chart, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Chart icon at the top toolbar, select the needed chart type from the available ones - Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, XY (Scatter), or Stock, Note: for Column, Line, Pie, or Bar charts, a 3D format is also available. after that the Chart Editor window will appear where you can enter the necessary data into the cells using the following controls: and for copying and pasting the copied data and for undoing and redoing actions for inserting a function and for decreasing and increasing decimal places for changing the number format, i.e. the way the numbers you enter appear in cells change the chart settings clicking the Edit Chart button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart - Advanced Settings window will open. The Type &amp Data tab allows you to change the chart type as well as the data you wish to use to create a chart. Select a chart Type you wish to apply: Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, XY (Scatter), or Stock. Check the selected Data Range and modify it, if necessary, clicking the Select Data button and entering the desired data range in the following format: Sheet1!A1:B4. Choose the way to arrange the data. You can either select the Data series to be used on the X axis: in rows or in columns. The Layout tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements. Specify the Chart Title position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a chart title, Overlay to overlay and center a title on the plot area, No Overlay to display the title above the plot area. Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a legend, Bottom to display the legend and align it to the bottom of the plot area, Top to display the legend and align it to the top of the plot area, Right to display the legend and align it to the right of the plot area, Left to display the legend and align it to the left of the plot area, Left Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left on the plot area, Right Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right on the plot area. Specify the Data Labels (i.e. text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters: specify the Data Labels position relative to the data points selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type. For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner Bottom, Inner Top, Outer Top. For Line/XY (Scatter)/Stock charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Left, Right, Top, Bottom. For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to Width, Inner Top, Outer Top. For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line and Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center. select the data you wish to include into your labels checking the corresponding boxes: Series Name, Category Name, Value, enter a character (comma, semicolon etc.) you wish to use for separating several labels into the Data Labels Separator entry field. Lines - is used to choose a line style for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. You can choose one of the following options: Straight to use straight lines between data points, Smooth to use smooth curves between data points, or None to not display lines. Markers - is used to specify whether the markers should be displayed (if the box is checked) or not (if the box is unchecked) for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. Note: the Lines and Markers options are available for Line charts and XY (Scatter) charts only. The Axis Settings section allows to specify if you wish to display Horizontal/Vertical Axis or not selecting the Show or Hide option from the drop-down list. You can also specify Horizontal/Vertical Axis Title parameters: Specify if you wish to display the Horizontal Axis Title or not selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a horizontal axis title, No Overlay to display the title below the horizontal axis. Specify the Vertical Axis Title orientation selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a vertical axis title, Rotated to display the title from bottom to top to the left of the vertical axis, Horizontal to display the title horizontally to the left of the vertical axis. The Gridlines section allows to specify which of the Horizontal/Vertical Gridlines you wish to display selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: Major, Minor, or Major and Minor. You can hide the gridlines at all using the None option. Note: the Axis Settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines. Note: the Vertical/Horizontal Axis tabs will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes. The Vertical Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. The Axis Options section allows to set the following parameters: Minimum Value - is used to specify a lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Maximum Value - is used to specify a highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis. Display Units - is used to determine a representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units. Values in reverse order - is used to display values in an opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom. The Tick Options section allows to adjust the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed, if the corresponding option is set at the Layout tab. The Major/Minor Type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. The Label Options section allows to adjust the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label Position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display tick mark labels, Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area, High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area, Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis. The Horizontal Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis which displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis which displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. The Axis Options section allows to set the following parameters: Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis. Axis Position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On Tick Marks or Between Tick Marks. Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in an opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left. The Tick Options section allows to adjust the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed, if the corresponding option is set at the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters: Major/Minor Type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. Interval between Marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks. The Label Options section allows to adjust the appearance of labels which display categories. Label Position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis. Axis Label Distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is. Interval between Labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category etc. The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the chart. Move and resize charts Once the chart is added, you can change its size and position. To change the chart size, drag small squares situated on its edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected chart while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. To alter the chart position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the chart. Drag the chart to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the chart, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected). Edit chart elements To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type in your own one instead. To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use icons at the Home tab of the top toolbar to change the font type, size, color or its decoration style. To delete a chart element, select it by left-clicking and press the Delete key on the keyboard. You can also rotate 3D charts using the mouse. Left-click within the plot area and hold the mouse button. Drag the cursor without releasing the mouse button to change the 3D chart orientation. Adjust chart settings Some of the chart settings can be altered using the Chart settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the chart and choose the Chart settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Size is used to view the current chart Width and Height. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Change Chart Type is used to change the selected chart type and/or style. To select the necessary chart Style, use the second drop-down menu in the Change Chart Type section. Edit Data is used to open the 'Chart Editor' window. Note: to quickly open the 'Chart Editor' window you can also double-click the chart in the document. Some of these options you can also find in the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Arrange is used to bring the selected chart to foreground, send to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup charts to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects you can refer to this page. Align is used to align the chart left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to this page. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is unavailable for charts. Edit Data is used to open the 'Chart Editor' window. Chart Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Chart - Advanced Settings' window. When the chart is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right, since a shape is used as a background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab at the right sidebar and adjust the shape Fill, Stroke and Wrapping Style. Note that you cannot change the shape type. To change the chart advanced settings, click the needed chart with the right mouse button and select Chart Advanced Settings from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The chart properties window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width and Height - use these options to change the chart width and/or height. If the Constant Proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original chart aspect ratio. The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the chart is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). Inline - the chart is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the chart moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the chart can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the chart. Tight - the text wraps the actual chart edges. Through - the text wraps around the chart edges and fills in the open white space within the chart. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the chart. In front - the chart overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the chart. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom style you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if you select a wrapping style other than inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three chart positioning types: Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin. The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three chart positioning types: Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. Move object with text controls whether the chart moves as the text to which it is anchored moves. Allow overlap controls whether two charts overlap or not if you drag them near each other on the page. The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the chart."
+        "body": "Insert a chart To insert a chart into your document, put the cursor at the place where you want to add a chart, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Chart icon at the top toolbar, select the needed chart type from the available ones - Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, XY (Scatter), or Stock, Note: for Column, Line, Pie, or Bar charts, a 3D format is also available. after that the Chart Editor window will appear where you can enter the necessary data into the cells using the following controls: and for copying and pasting the copied data and for undoing and redoing actions for inserting a function and for decreasing and increasing decimal places for changing the number format, i.e. the way the numbers you enter appear in cells change the chart settings clicking the Edit Chart button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart - Advanced Settings window will open. The Type &amp Data tab allows you to change the chart type as well as the data you wish to use to create a chart. Select a chart Type you wish to apply: Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, XY (Scatter), or Stock. Check the selected Data Range and modify it, if necessary, clicking the Select Data button and entering the desired data range in the following format: Sheet1!A1:B4. Choose the way to arrange the data. You can either select the Data series to be used on the X axis: in rows or in columns. The Layout tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements. Specify the Chart Title position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a chart title, Overlay to overlay and center a title on the plot area, No Overlay to display the title above the plot area. Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a legend, Bottom to display the legend and align it to the bottom of the plot area, Top to display the legend and align it to the top of the plot area, Right to display the legend and align it to the right of the plot area, Left to display the legend and align it to the left of the plot area, Left Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left on the plot area, Right Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right on the plot area. Specify the Data Labels (i.e. text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters: specify the Data Labels position relative to the data points selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type. For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner Bottom, Inner Top, Outer Top. For Line/XY (Scatter)/Stock charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Left, Right, Top, Bottom. For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to Width, Inner Top, Outer Top. For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line and Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center. select the data you wish to include into your labels checking the corresponding boxes: Series Name, Category Name, Value, enter a character (comma, semicolon etc.) you wish to use for separating several labels into the Data Labels Separator entry field. Lines - is used to choose a line style for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. You can choose one of the following options: Straight to use straight lines between data points, Smooth to use smooth curves between data points, or None to not display lines. Markers - is used to specify whether the markers should be displayed (if the box is checked) or not (if the box is unchecked) for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. Note: the Lines and Markers options are available for Line charts and XY (Scatter) charts only. The Axis Settings section allows to specify if you wish to display Horizontal/Vertical Axis or not selecting the Show or Hide option from the drop-down list. You can also specify Horizontal/Vertical Axis Title parameters: Specify if you wish to display the Horizontal Axis Title or not selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a horizontal axis title, No Overlay to display the title below the horizontal axis. Specify the Vertical Axis Title orientation selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a vertical axis title, Rotated to display the title from bottom to top to the left of the vertical axis, Horizontal to display the title horizontally to the left of the vertical axis. The Gridlines section allows to specify which of the Horizontal/Vertical Gridlines you wish to display selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: Major, Minor, or Major and Minor. You can hide the gridlines at all using the None option. Note: the Axis Settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines. Note: the Vertical/Horizontal Axis tabs will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes. The Vertical Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. The Axis Options section allows to set the following parameters: Minimum Value - is used to specify a lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Maximum Value - is used to specify a highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis. Display Units - is used to determine a representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units. Values in reverse order - is used to display values in an opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom. The Tick Options section allows to adjust the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed, if the corresponding option is set at the Layout tab. The Major/Minor Type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. The Label Options section allows to adjust the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label Position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display tick mark labels, Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area, High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area, Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis. The Horizontal Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis which displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis which displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. The Axis Options section allows to set the following parameters: Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis. Axis Position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On Tick Marks or Between Tick Marks. Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in an opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left. The Tick Options section allows to adjust the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed, if the corresponding option is set at the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters: Major/Minor Type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. Interval between Marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks. The Label Options section allows to adjust the appearance of labels which display categories. Label Position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis. Axis Label Distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is. Interval between Labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category etc. The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the chart. Move and resize charts Once the chart is added, you can change its size and position. To change the chart size, drag small squares situated on its edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected chart while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. To alter the chart position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the chart. Drag the chart to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the chart, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected). Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. Edit chart elements To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type in your own one instead. To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use icons at the Home tab of the top toolbar to change the font type, size, color or its decoration style. To delete a chart element, select it by left-clicking and press the Delete key on the keyboard. You can also rotate 3D charts using the mouse. Left-click within the plot area and hold the mouse button. Drag the cursor without releasing the mouse button to change the 3D chart orientation. Adjust chart settings Some of the chart settings can be altered using the Chart settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the chart and choose the Chart settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Size is used to view the current chart Width and Height. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Change Chart Type is used to change the selected chart type and/or style. To select the necessary chart Style, use the second drop-down menu in the Change Chart Type section. Edit Data is used to open the 'Chart Editor' window. Note: to quickly open the 'Chart Editor' window you can also double-click the chart in the document. Some of these options you can also find in the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Arrange is used to bring the selected chart to foreground, send to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup charts to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects you can refer to this page. Align is used to align the chart left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to this page. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is unavailable for charts. Edit Data is used to open the 'Chart Editor' window. Chart Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Chart - Advanced Settings' window. When the chart is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right, since a shape is used as a background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab at the right sidebar and adjust the shape Fill, Stroke and Wrapping Style. Note that you cannot change the shape type. To change the chart advanced settings, click the needed chart with the right mouse button and select Chart Advanced Settings from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The chart properties window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width and Height - use these options to change the chart width and/or height. If the Constant Proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original chart aspect ratio. The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the chart is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). Inline - the chart is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the chart moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the chart can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the chart. Tight - the text wraps the actual chart edges. Through - the text wraps around the chart edges and fills in the open white space within the chart. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the chart. In front - the chart overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the chart. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom style you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if you select a wrapping style other than inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three chart positioning types: Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin. The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three chart positioning types: Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. Move object with text controls whether the chart moves as the text to which it is anchored moves. Allow overlap controls whether two charts overlap or not if you drag them near each other on the page. The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the chart."
     },
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm", 
@@ -193,17 +193,17 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm", 
         "title": "Insert images", 
-        "body": "In Document Editor, you can insert images in the most popular formats into your document. The following image formats are supported: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Insert an image To insert an image into the document text, place the cursor where you want the image to be put, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Picture icon at the top toolbar, select one of the following options to load the image: the Picture from File option will open the standard Windows dialog window for file selection. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary file and click the Open button the Picture from URL option will open the window where you can enter the necessary image web address and click the OK button once the image is added you can change its size, properties, and position. Move and resize images To change the image size, drag small squares situated on its edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected image while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. To alter the image position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the image. Drag the image to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the image, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected). To rotate the image, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating. Adjust image settings Some of the image settings can be altered using the Image settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the image and choose the Image settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Size is used to view the current image Width and Height. If necessary, you can restore the default image size clicking the Default Size button. The Fit to Margin button allows to resize the image, so that it occupies all the space between the left and right page margin. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Replace Image is used to replace the current image loading another one from file or URL. Some of these options you can also find in the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Arrange is used to bring the selected image to foreground, send to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup images to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects you can refer to this page. Align is used to align the image left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to this page. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if you select a wrapping style other than Inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. Default Size is used to change the current image size to the default one. Image Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Image - Advanced Settings' window. When the image is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab at the right sidebar and adjust the shape Stroke type, size and color as well as change the shape type selecting another shape from the Change Autoshape menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly. To change its advanced settings, click the image with the right mouse button and select the Image Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The image properties window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width and Height - use these options to change the image width and/or height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. To restore the default size of the added image, click the Default Size button. The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the image is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). Inline - the image is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the image moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the image can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the image. Tight - the text wraps the actual image edges. Through - the text wraps around the image edges and fills in the open white space within the image. So that the effect can appear, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the image. In front - the image overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the image. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom style, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if you select a wrapping style other than inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three image positioning types: Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin. The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three image positioning types: Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. Move object with text controls whether the image moves as the text to which it is anchored moves. Allow overlap controls whether two images overlap or not if you drag them near each other on the page. The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image."
+        "body": "In Document Editor, you can insert images in the most popular formats into your document. The following image formats are supported: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Insert an image To insert an image into the document text, place the cursor where you want the image to be put, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Picture icon at the top toolbar, select one of the following options to load the image: the Picture from File option will open the standard Windows dialog window for file selection. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary file and click the Open button the Picture from URL option will open the window where you can enter the necessary image web address and click the OK button once the image is added you can change its size, properties, and position. Move and resize images To change the image size, drag small squares situated on its edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected image while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. To alter the image position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the image. Drag the image to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the image, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected). To rotate the image, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating. Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. Adjust image settings Some of the image settings can be altered using the Image settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the image and choose the Image settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Size is used to view the current image Width and Height. If necessary, you can restore the default image size clicking the Default Size button. The Fit to Margin button allows to resize the image, so that it occupies all the space between the left and right page margin. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Replace Image is used to replace the current image loading another one From File or From URL. Some of these options you can also find in the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Arrange is used to bring the selected image to foreground, send to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup images to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects you can refer to this page. Align is used to align the image left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to this page. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if you select a wrapping style other than Inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. Default Size is used to change the current image size to the default one. Replace image is used to replace the current image loading another one From File or From URL. Image Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Image - Advanced Settings' window. When the image is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab at the right sidebar and adjust the shape Stroke type, size and color as well as change the shape type selecting another shape from the Change Autoshape menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly. To change the image advanced settings, click the image with the right mouse button and select the Image Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The image properties window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width and Height - use these options to change the image width and/or height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. To restore the default size of the added image, click the Default Size button. The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the image is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). Inline - the image is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the image moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the image can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the image. Tight - the text wraps the actual image edges. Through - the text wraps around the image edges and fills in the open white space within the image. So that the effect can appear, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the image. In front - the image overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the image. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom style, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if you select a wrapping style other than inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three image positioning types: Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin. The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three image positioning types: Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. Move object with text controls whether the image moves as the text to which it is anchored moves. Allow overlap controls whether two images overlap or not if you drag them near each other on the page. The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image."
     },
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm", 
         "title": "Insert page numbers", 
-        "body": "To insert page numbers into your document, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Header/Footer icon at the top toolbar, choose the Insert Page Number submenu, select one of the following options: To put a page number to each page of your document, select the page number position on the page. To insert a page number at the current cursor position, select the To Current Position option. To insert the total number of pages in your document (e.g. if you want to create the Page X of Y entry): put the cursor where you want to insert the total number of pages, click the Header/Footer icon at the top toolbar, select the Insert number of pages option. To edit the page number settings, double-click the page number added, change the current parameters at the right sidebar: Set the Position of page numbers on the page as well as relative to the top and bottom of the page. Check the Different first page box to apply a different page number to the very first page or in case you don't want to add any number to it at all. Use the Different odd and even pages box to insert different page numbers for odd and even pages. The Link to Previous option is available in case you've previously added sections into your document. If not, it will be grayed out. Moreover, this option is also unavailable for the very first section (i.e. when a header or footer that belongs to the first section is selected). By default, this box is checked, so that unified numbering is applied to all the sections. If you select a header or footer area, you will see that the area is marked with the Same as Previous label. Uncheck the Link to Previous box to use different page numbering for each section of the document. The Same as Previous label will no longer be displayed. To return to the document editing, double-click within the working area."
+        "body": "To insert page numbers into your document, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Header/Footer icon at the top toolbar, choose the Insert Page Number submenu, select one of the following options: To put a page number to each page of your document, select the page number position on the page. To insert a page number at the current cursor position, select the To Current Position option. Note: to insert a current page number at the current cursor position you can also use the Ctrl+Shift+P key combination. To insert the total number of pages in your document (e.g. if you want to create the Page X of Y entry): put the cursor where you want to insert the total number of pages, click the Header/Footer icon at the top toolbar, select the Insert number of pages option. To edit the page number settings, double-click the page number added, change the current parameters at the right sidebar: Set the Position of page numbers on the page as well as relative to the top and bottom of the page. Check the Different first page box to apply a different page number to the very first page or in case you don't want to add any number to it at all. Use the Different odd and even pages box to insert different page numbers for odd and even pages. The Link to Previous option is available in case you've previously added sections into your document. If not, it will be grayed out. Moreover, this option is also unavailable for the very first section (i.e. when a header or footer that belongs to the first section is selected). By default, this box is checked, so that unified numbering is applied to all the sections. If you select a header or footer area, you will see that the area is marked with the Same as Previous label. Uncheck the Link to Previous box to use different page numbering for each section of the document. The Same as Previous label will no longer be displayed. The Page Numbering section allows to adjust page numbering options across different sections of the document. The Continue from previous section option is selected by default and allows to keep continuous page numbering after a section break. If you want to start page numbering with a specific number in the current section of the document, select the Start at radio button and enter the necessary starting value in the field on the right. To return to the document editing, double-click within the working area."
     },
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm", 
         "title": "Insert tables", 
-        "body": "Insert a table To insert a table into the document text, place the cursor where you want the table to be put, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Table icon at the top toolbar, select the option to create a table: either a table with predefined number of cells (10 by 8 cells maximum) If you want to quickly add a table, just select the number of rows (8 maximum) and columns (10 maximum). or a custom table In case you need more than 10 by 8 cell table, select the Insert Custom Table option that will open the window where you can enter the necessary number of rows and columns respectively, then click the OK button. once the table is added you can change its properties, size and position. To resize a table, hover the mouse cursor over the handle in its lower right corner and drag it until the table reaches the necessary size. You can also manually change the width of a certain column or the height of a row. Move the mouse cursor over the right border of the column so that the cursor turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the left or right to set the necessary width. To change the height of a single row manually, move the mouse cursor over the bottom border of the row so that the cursor turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border up or down. To move a table, hold down the handle in its upper left corner and drag it to the necessary place in the document. Select a table or its part To select an entire table, click the handle in its upper left corner. To select a certain cell, move the mouse cursor to the left side of the necessary cell so that the cursor turns into the black arrow , then left-click. To select a certain row, move the mouse cursor to the left border of the table next to the necessary row so that the cursor turns into the horizontal black arrow , then left-click. To select a certain column, move the mouse cursor to the top border of the necessary column so that the cursor turns into the downward black arrow , then left-click. It's also possible to select a cell, row, column or table using options from the contextual menu or from the Rows & Columns section at the right sidebar. Adjust table settings Some of the table properties as well as its structure can be altered using the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Select is used to select a row, column, cell, or table. Insert is used to insert a row above or row below the row where the cursor is placed as well as to insert a column at the left or right side from the column where the cursor is placed. Delete is used to delete a row, column or table. Merge Cells is available if two or more cells are selected and is used to merge them. Split Cell... is used to open a window where you can select the needed number of columns and rows the cell will be split in. Distribute rows is used to adjust the selected cells so that they have the same height without changing the overall table height. Distribute columns is used to adjust the selected cells so that they have the same width without changing the overall table width. Cell Vertical Alignment is used to align the text top, center or bottom in the selected cell. Text Direction - is used to change the text orientation in a cell. You can place the text horizontally, vertically from top to bottom (Rotate at 90°), or vertically from bottom to top (Rotate at 270°). Table Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Table - Advanced Settings' window. Hyperlink is used to insert a hyperlink. Paragraph Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Paragraph - Advanced Settings' window. You can also change the table properties at the right sidebar: Rows and Columns are used to select the table parts that you want to be highlighted. For rows: Header - to highlight the first row Total - to highlight the last row Banded - to highlight every other row For columns: First - to highlight the first column Last - to highlight the last column Banded - to highlight every other column Select from Template is used to choose a table template from the available ones. Borders Style is used to select the border size, color, style as well as background color. Rows &amp; Columns is used to perform some operations with the table: select, delete, insert rows and columns, merge cells, split a cell. Cell Size is used to adjust the width and height of the currently selected cell. In this section, you can also Distribute rows so that all the selected cells have equal height or Distribute columns so that all the selected cells have equal width. Repeat as header row at the top of each page is used to insert the same header row at the top of each page in long tables. Show advanced settings is used to open the 'Table - Advanced Settings' window. To change the advanced table properties, click the table with the right mouse button and select the Table Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The table properties window will open: The Table tab allows to change properties of the entire table. The Table Size section contains the following parameters: Width - by default, the table width is automatically adjusted to fit the page width, i.e. the table occupies all the space between the left and right page margin. You can check this box and specify the necessary table width manually. Measure in - allows to specify if you want to set the table width in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) or in Percent of the overall page width. Note: you can also adjust the table size manually changing the row height and column width. Move the mouse cursor over a row/column border until it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border. You can also use the markers on the horizontal ruler to change the column width and the markers on the vertical ruler to change the row height. Automatically resize to fit contents - enables automatic change of each column width in accordance with the text within its cells. The Default Cell Margins section allows to change the space between the text within the cells and the cell border used by default. The Options section allows to change the following parameter: Spacing between cells - the cell spacing which will be filled with the Table Background color. The Cell tab allows to change properties of individual cells. First you need to select the cell you want to apply the changes to or select the entire table to change properties of all its cells. The Cell Size section contains the following parameters: Preferred width - allows to set a preferred cell width. This is the size that a cell strives to fit to, but in some cases it may not be possible to fit to this exact value. For example, if the text within a cell exceeds the specified width, it will be broken into the next line so that the preferred cell width remains unchanged, but if you insert a new column, the preferred width will be reduced. Measure in - allows to specify if you want to set the cell width in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) or in Percent of the overall table width. Note: you can also adjust the cell width manually. To make a single cell in a column wider or narrower than the overall column width, select the necessary cell and move the mouse cursor over its right border until it turns into the bidirectional arrow, then drag the border. To change the width of all the cells in a column, use the markers on the horizontal ruler to change the column width. The Cell Margins section allows to adjust the space between the text within the cells and the cell border. By default, standard values are used (the default values can also be altered at the Table tab), but you can uncheck the Use default margins box and enter the necessary values manually. The Cell Options section allows to change the following parameter: The Wrap text option is enabled by default. It allows to wrap text within a cell that exceeds its width onto the next line expanding the row height and keeping the column width unchanged. The Borders &amp; Background tab contains the following parameters: Border parameters (size, color and presence or absence) - set the border size, select its color and choose the way it will be displayed in the cells. Note: in case you select not to show table borders clicking the button or deselecting all the borders manually on the diagram, they will be indicated by a dotted line in the document. To make them disappear at all, click the Nonprinting characters icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the Hidden Table Borders option. Cell Background - the color for the background within the cells (available only if one or more cells are selected or the Allow spacing between cells option is selected at the Table tab). Table Background - the color for the table background or the space background between the cells in case the Allow spacing between cells option is selected at the Table tab. The Table Position tab is available only if the Flow table option at the Text Wrapping tab is selected and contains the following parameters: Horizontal parameters include the table alignment (left, center, right) relative to margin, page or text as well as the table position to the right of margin, page or text. Vertical parameters include the table alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to margin, page or text as well as the table position below margin, page or text. The Options section allows to change the following parameters: Move object with text controls whether the table moves as the text into which it is inserted moves. Allow overlap controls whether two tables are merged into one large table or overlap if you drag them near each other on the page. The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Text wrapping style - Inline table or Flow table. Use the necessary option to change the way the table is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline table) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select the flow table). After you select the wrapping style, the additional wrapping parameters can be set both for inline and flow tables: For the inline table, you can specify the table alignment and indent from left. For the flow table, you can specify the distance from text and table position at the Table Position tab. The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the table."
+        "body": "Insert a table To insert a table into the document text, place the cursor where you want the table to be put, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Table icon at the top toolbar, select the option to create a table: either a table with predefined number of cells (10 by 8 cells maximum) If you want to quickly add a table, just select the number of rows (8 maximum) and columns (10 maximum). or a custom table In case you need more than 10 by 8 cell table, select the Insert Custom Table option that will open the window where you can enter the necessary number of rows and columns respectively, then click the OK button. once the table is added you can change its properties, size and position. To resize a table, hover the mouse cursor over the handle in its lower right corner and drag it until the table reaches the necessary size. You can also manually change the width of a certain column or the height of a row. Move the mouse cursor over the right border of the column so that the cursor turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the left or right to set the necessary width. To change the height of a single row manually, move the mouse cursor over the bottom border of the row so that the cursor turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border up or down. To move a table, hold down the handle in its upper left corner and drag it to the necessary place in the document. Select a table or its part To select an entire table, click the handle in its upper left corner. To select a certain cell, move the mouse cursor to the left side of the necessary cell so that the cursor turns into the black arrow , then left-click. To select a certain row, move the mouse cursor to the left border of the table next to the necessary row so that the cursor turns into the horizontal black arrow , then left-click. To select a certain column, move the mouse cursor to the top border of the necessary column so that the cursor turns into the downward black arrow , then left-click. It's also possible to select a cell, row, column or table using options from the contextual menu or from the Rows & Columns section at the right sidebar. Note: to move around in a table you can use keyboard shortcuts. Adjust table settings Some of the table properties as well as its structure can be altered using the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy a selected text/object and paste a previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Select is used to select a row, column, cell, or table. Insert is used to insert a row above or row below the row where the cursor is placed as well as to insert a column at the left or right side from the column where the cursor is placed. Delete is used to delete a row, column or table. Merge Cells is available if two or more cells are selected and is used to merge them. Split Cell... is used to open a window where you can select the needed number of columns and rows the cell will be split in. Distribute rows is used to adjust the selected cells so that they have the same height without changing the overall table height. Distribute columns is used to adjust the selected cells so that they have the same width without changing the overall table width. Cell Vertical Alignment is used to align the text top, center or bottom in the selected cell. Text Direction - is used to change the text orientation in a cell. You can place the text horizontally, vertically from top to bottom (Rotate at 90°), or vertically from bottom to top (Rotate at 270°). Table Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Table - Advanced Settings' window. Hyperlink is used to insert a hyperlink. Paragraph Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Paragraph - Advanced Settings' window. You can also change the table properties at the right sidebar: Rows and Columns are used to select the table parts that you want to be highlighted. For rows: Header - to highlight the first row Total - to highlight the last row Banded - to highlight every other row For columns: First - to highlight the first column Last - to highlight the last column Banded - to highlight every other column Select from Template is used to choose a table template from the available ones. Borders Style is used to select the border size, color, style as well as background color. Rows &amp; Columns is used to perform some operations with the table: select, delete, insert rows and columns, merge cells, split a cell. Cell Size is used to adjust the width and height of the currently selected cell. In this section, you can also Distribute rows so that all the selected cells have equal height or Distribute columns so that all the selected cells have equal width. Repeat as header row at the top of each page is used to insert the same header row at the top of each page in long tables. Show advanced settings is used to open the 'Table - Advanced Settings' window. To change the advanced table properties, click the table with the right mouse button and select the Table Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The table properties window will open: The Table tab allows to change properties of the entire table. The Table Size section contains the following parameters: Width - by default, the table width is automatically adjusted to fit the page width, i.e. the table occupies all the space between the left and right page margin. You can check this box and specify the necessary table width manually. Measure in - allows to specify if you want to set the table width in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) or in Percent of the overall page width. Note: you can also adjust the table size manually changing the row height and column width. Move the mouse cursor over a row/column border until it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border. You can also use the markers on the horizontal ruler to change the column width and the markers on the vertical ruler to change the row height. Automatically resize to fit contents - enables automatic change of each column width in accordance with the text within its cells. The Default Cell Margins section allows to change the space between the text within the cells and the cell border used by default. The Options section allows to change the following parameter: Spacing between cells - the cell spacing which will be filled with the Table Background color. The Cell tab allows to change properties of individual cells. First you need to select the cell you want to apply the changes to or select the entire table to change properties of all its cells. The Cell Size section contains the following parameters: Preferred width - allows to set a preferred cell width. This is the size that a cell strives to fit to, but in some cases it may not be possible to fit to this exact value. For example, if the text within a cell exceeds the specified width, it will be broken into the next line so that the preferred cell width remains unchanged, but if you insert a new column, the preferred width will be reduced. Measure in - allows to specify if you want to set the cell width in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified at the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) or in Percent of the overall table width. Note: you can also adjust the cell width manually. To make a single cell in a column wider or narrower than the overall column width, select the necessary cell and move the mouse cursor over its right border until it turns into the bidirectional arrow, then drag the border. To change the width of all the cells in a column, use the markers on the horizontal ruler to change the column width. The Cell Margins section allows to adjust the space between the text within the cells and the cell border. By default, standard values are used (the default values can also be altered at the Table tab), but you can uncheck the Use default margins box and enter the necessary values manually. The Cell Options section allows to change the following parameter: The Wrap text option is enabled by default. It allows to wrap text within a cell that exceeds its width onto the next line expanding the row height and keeping the column width unchanged. The Borders &amp; Background tab contains the following parameters: Border parameters (size, color and presence or absence) - set the border size, select its color and choose the way it will be displayed in the cells. Note: in case you select not to show table borders clicking the button or deselecting all the borders manually on the diagram, they will be indicated by a dotted line in the document. To make them disappear at all, click the Nonprinting characters icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the Hidden Table Borders option. Cell Background - the color for the background within the cells (available only if one or more cells are selected or the Allow spacing between cells option is selected at the Table tab). Table Background - the color for the table background or the space background between the cells in case the Allow spacing between cells option is selected at the Table tab. The Table Position tab is available only if the Flow table option at the Text Wrapping tab is selected and contains the following parameters: Horizontal parameters include the table alignment (left, center, right) relative to margin, page or text as well as the table position to the right of margin, page or text. Vertical parameters include the table alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to margin, page or text as well as the table position below margin, page or text. The Options section allows to change the following parameters: Move object with text controls whether the table moves as the text into which it is inserted moves. Allow overlap controls whether two tables are merged into one large table or overlap if you drag them near each other on the page. The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Text wrapping style - Inline table or Flow table. Use the necessary option to change the way the table is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline table) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select the flow table). After you select the wrapping style, the additional wrapping parameters can be set both for inline and flow tables: For the inline table, you can specify the table alignment and indent from left. For the flow table, you can specify the distance from text and table position at the Table Position tab. The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the table."
     },
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm", 
@@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/NonprintingCharacters.htm", 
         "title": "Show/hide nonprinting characters", 
-        "body": "Nonprinting characters help you edit a document. They indicate the presence of various types of formatting, but they do not print with the document, even when they are displayed on the screen. To show or hide nonprinting characters, click the Nonprinting characters icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar. Nonprinting characters include: Spaces Inserted when you press the Spacebar on the keyboard. It creates a space between characters. Tabs Inserted when you press the Tab key. It's used to advance the cursor to the next tab stop. Paragraph marks (i.e. hard returns) Inserted when you press the Enter key. It ends a paragraph and adds a bit of space after it. It contains information about the paragraph formatting. Line breaks (i.e. soft returns) Inserted when you use the Shift+Enter key combination. It breaks the current line and puts lines of text close together. Soft return is primarily used in titles and headings. Nonbreaking spaces Inserted when you use the Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar key combination. It creates a space between characters which can't be used to start a new line. Page breaks Inserted when you use the Breaks icon at the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar and then select the Insert Page Break option, or select the Page break before option in the right-click menu or advanced settings window. Section breaks Inserted when you use the Breaks icon at the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar and then select one of the Insert Section Break submenu options (the section break indicator differs depending on which option is selected: Next Page, Continuous Page, Even Page or Odd Page). Column breaks Inserted when you use the Breaks icon at the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar and then select the Insert Column Break option. End-of-cell and end-of row markers in tables These markers contain formatting codes for the individual cell and row, respectively. Small black square in the margin to the left of a paragraph It indicates that at least one of the paragraph options was applied, e.g. Keep lines together, Page break before. Anchor symbols They indicate the position of floating objects (those with a wrapping style other than Inline), e.g. images, autoshapes, charts. You should select an object to make its anchor visible."
+        "body": "Nonprinting characters help you edit a document. They indicate the presence of various types of formatting, but they do not print with the document, even when they are displayed on the screen. To show or hide nonprinting characters, click the Nonprinting characters icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar. Alternatively, you can use the Ctrl+Shift+Num8 key combination. Nonprinting characters include: Spaces Inserted when you press the Spacebar on the keyboard. It creates a space between characters. Tabs Inserted when you press the Tab key. It's used to advance the cursor to the next tab stop. Paragraph marks (i.e. hard returns) Inserted when you press the Enter key. It ends a paragraph and adds a bit of space after it. It contains information about the paragraph formatting. Line breaks (i.e. soft returns) Inserted when you use the Shift+Enter key combination. It breaks the current line and puts lines of text close together. Soft return is primarily used in titles and headings. Nonbreaking spaces Inserted when you use the Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar key combination. It creates a space between characters which can't be used to start a new line. Page breaks Inserted when you use the Breaks icon at the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar and then select the Insert Page Break option, or select the Page break before option in the right-click menu or advanced settings window. Section breaks Inserted when you use the Breaks icon at the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar and then select one of the Insert Section Break submenu options (the section break indicator differs depending on which option is selected: Next Page, Continuous Page, Even Page or Odd Page). Column breaks Inserted when you use the Breaks icon at the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar and then select the Insert Column Break option. End-of-cell and end-of row markers in tables These markers contain formatting codes for the individual cell and row, respectively. Small black square in the margin to the left of a paragraph It indicates that at least one of the paragraph options was applied, e.g. Keep lines together, Page break before. Anchor symbols They indicate the position of floating objects (those with a wrapping style other than Inline), e.g. images, autoshapes, charts. You should select an object to make its anchor visible."
     },
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm", 
@@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm", 
         "title": "Insert page breaks", 
-        "body": "In Document Editor, you can add the page break to start a new page and adjust pagination options. To insert a page break at the current cursor position click the Breaks icon at the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar or click the arrow next to this icon and select the Insert Page Break option from the menu. To insert a page break before the selected paragraph i.e. to start this paragraph at the top of a new page: click the right mouse button and select the Page break before option in the menu, or click the right mouse button, select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar, and check the Page break before box in the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. To keep lines together so that only whole paragraphs will be moved to the new page (i.e. there will be no page break between the lines within a single paragraph), click the right mouse button and select the Keep lines together option in the menu, or click the right mouse button, select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar, and check the Keep lines together box in the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. The Paragraph - Advanced Settings window allows you to set two more pagination options: Keep with next - is used to prevent a page break between the selected paragraph and the next one. Orphan control - is selected by default and used to prevent a single line of the paragraph (the first or last) from appearing at the top or bottom of the page."
+        "body": "In Document Editor, you can add the page break to start a new page and adjust pagination options. To insert a page break at the current cursor position click the Breaks icon at the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar or click the arrow next to this icon and select the Insert Page Break option from the menu. You can also use the Ctrl+Enter key combination. To insert a page break before the selected paragraph i.e. to start this paragraph at the top of a new page: click the right mouse button and select the Page break before option in the menu, or click the right mouse button, select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar, and check the Page break before box in the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. To keep lines together so that only whole paragraphs will be moved to the new page (i.e. there will be no page break between the lines within a single paragraph), click the right mouse button and select the Keep lines together option in the menu, or click the right mouse button, select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar, and check the Keep lines together box in the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. The Paragraph - Advanced Settings window allows you to set two more pagination options: Keep with next - is used to prevent a page break between the selected paragraph and the next one. Orphan control - is selected by default and used to prevent a single line of the paragraph (the first or last) from appearing at the top or bottom of the page."
     },
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/ParagraphIndents.htm", 
@@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm", 
         "title": "Save/download/print your document", 
-        "body": "Save/download/ print your document By default, Document Editor automatically saves your file each 2 seconds when you work on it preventing your data loss in case of the unexpected program closing. If you co-edit the file in the Fast mode, the timer requests for updates 25 times a second and saves the changes if they have been made. When the file is being co-edited in the Strict mode, changes are automatically saved at 10-minute intervals. If you need, you can easily select the preferred co-editing mode or disable the Autosave feature on the Advanced Settings page. To save your current document manually, press the Save icon at the top toolbar, or use the Ctrl+S key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Save option. To download the resulting document onto your computer hard disk drive, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Download as... option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: PDF, TXT, DOCX, ODT, HTML. To print out the current document, click the Print icon at the top toolbar, or use the Ctrl+P key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Print option. After that a PDF file will be generated on the basis of the document. You can open and print it out, or save onto your computer hard disk drive or removable medium to print it out later."
+        "body": "Save/download/ print your document By default, Document Editor automatically saves your file each 2 seconds when you work on it preventing your data loss in case of the unexpected program closing. If you co-edit the file in the Fast mode, the timer requests for updates 25 times a second and saves the changes if they have been made. When the file is being co-edited in the Strict mode, changes are automatically saved at 10-minute intervals. If you need, you can easily select the preferred co-editing mode or disable the Autosave feature on the Advanced Settings page. To save your current document manually, press the Save icon at the top toolbar, or use the Ctrl+S key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Save option. To download the resulting document onto your computer hard disk drive, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Download as... option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, PDF, TXT, ODT, RTF, HTML. To print out the current document, click the Print icon at the top toolbar, or use the Ctrl+P key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Print option. After that a PDF file will be generated on the basis of the document. You can open and print it out, or save onto your computer hard disk drive or removable medium to print it out later."
     },
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/SectionBreaks.htm", 
diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/About.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/About.htm
index a29770cf7..198598dca 100644
--- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/About.htm
+++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/About.htm
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
 			and edit presentations<span class="onlineDocumentFeatures"> directly in your browser</span>.</p>
 			<p>Using <b>Presentation Editor</b>, you can perform various editing operations like in any desktop editor, 
 			print the edited presentations keeping all the formatting details or download them onto your computer hard disk drive 
-			as PDF, PPTX, or ODP files.</p>
+			as PPTX, PDF, or ODP files.</p>
 			<p>To view the current software version and licensor details, click the <img alt="About icon" src="../images/about.png" /> icon at the left sidebar.</p>
 		</div>
 	</body>
diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm
index 9ac0582b7..90a000a3c 100644
--- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm
+++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
             <input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
         </div>
 		<h1>Advanced Settings of Presentation Editor</h1>
-			<p><b>Presentation Editor</b> lets you change its advanced settings. To access them, open the <b>File</b> tab at the top toolbar and select the <b>Advanced Settings...</b> option. You can also use the <img alt="Advanced settings icon" src="../images/advanced_settings_icon.png" /> icon in the right upper corner at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar.</p>
+			<p><b>Presentation Editor</b> lets you change its advanced settings. To access them, open the <b>File</b> tab at the top toolbar and select the <b>Advanced Settings...</b> option. You can also click the <b>View settings</b> <img alt="View settings icon" src="../images/viewsettingsicon.png" /> icon on the right side of the editor header and select the <b>Advanced settings</b> option.</p>
 			<p>The advanced settings are:</p>
 			<ul>
                 <li><b>Spell Checking</b> is used to turn on/off the spell checking option.</li>
diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm
index 8e05a663c..05c8d246c 100644
--- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm
+++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm
@@ -24,9 +24,9 @@
 					<td class="description">Open the <b>File</b> panel to save, download, print the current presentation, view its info, create a new presentation or open an existing one, access Presentation Editor help or advanced settings.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
-					<td>Open 'Search' panel</td>
+					<td>Open 'Search' dialog box</td>
 					<td>Ctrl+F</td>
-					<td>Open the <b>Search</b> panel to start searching for a character/word/phrase in the currently edited presentation.</td>
+					<td>Open the <b>Search</b> dialog box to start searching for a character/word/phrase in the currently edited presentation.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Open 'Comments' panel</td>
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
 				<tr>
 					<td>Save presentation</td>
 					<td>Ctrl+S</td>
-					<td>Save all the changes to the presentation currently edited with Presentation Editor.</td>
+					<td>Save all the changes to the presentation currently edited with Presentation Editor. The active file will be saved with its current file name, location, and file format.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Print presentation</td>
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@
 				<tr>
 					<td>Download As...</td>
 					<td>Ctrl+Shift+S</td>
-					<td>Save the currently edited presentation to the computer hard disk drive in one of the supported formats: PDF, PPTX, ODP.</td>
+					<td>Open the <b>Download as...</b> panel to save the currently edited presentation to the computer hard disk drive in one of the supported formats: PPTX, PDF, ODP.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Full screen</td>
@@ -67,6 +67,26 @@
                     <td>Help menu</td>
                     <td>F1</td>
                     <td>Open Presentation Editor <b>Help</b> menu.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Open existing file</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+O</td>
+                    <td>On the <b>Open local file</b> tab in desktop editors, opens the standard dialog box that allows to select an existing file.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Element contextual menu</td>
+                    <td>Shift+F10</td>
+                    <td>Open the selected element <b>contextual menu</b>.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Close file</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+W</td>
+                    <td>Close the selected presentation window.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Close the window (tab)</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+F4</td>
+                    <td>Close the tab in a browser.</td>
                 </tr>
 				<tr>
 					<th colspan="3">Navigation</th>
@@ -83,32 +103,22 @@
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Next slide</td>
-					<td>PgDn</td>
+					<td>Page Down</td>
 					<td>Go to the next slide of the currently edited presentation.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Previous slide</td>
-					<td>PgUp</td>
+					<td>Page Up</td>
 					<td>Go to the previous slide of the currently edited presentation.</td>
 				</tr>
-				<tr>
-					<td>Select the next shape</td>
-					<td>Tab</td>
-					<td>Select the next shape after the currently selected one.</td>
-				</tr>
-				<tr>
-					<td>Select the previous shape</td>
-					<td>Shift+Tab</td>
-					<td>Select the previous shape before the currently selected one.</td>
-				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Zoom In</td>
-					<td>Ctrl+plus (+)</td>
+					<td>Ctrl+Plus sign (+)</td>
 					<td>Zoom in the currently edited presentation.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Zoom Out</td>
-					<td>Ctrl+minus (-)</td>
+					<td>Ctrl+Minus sign (-)</td>
 					<td>Zoom out the currently edited presentation.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr id="manageslides">
@@ -126,26 +136,26 @@
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Move slide up</td>
-					<td>Ctrl+Up ARROW</td>
+					<td>Ctrl+Up Arrow</td>
 					<td>Move the selected slide above the previous one in the list.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Move slide down</td>
-					<td>Ctrl+Down ARROW</td>
+					<td>Ctrl+Down Arrow</td>
 					<td>Move the selected slide below the following one in the list.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Move slide to beginning</td>
-					<td>Ctrl+Shift+Up ARROW</td>
+					<td>Ctrl+Shift+Up Arrow</td>
 					<td>Move the selected slide to the very first position in the list.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Move slide to end</td>
-					<td>Ctrl+Shift+Down ARROW</td>
+					<td>Ctrl+Shift+Down Arrow</td>
 					<td>Move the selected slide to the very last position in the list.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
-				<th colspan="3">Performing Actions on Objects</th>
+				<th colspan="3"><a id="workwithobjects"></a>Performing Actions on Objects</th>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Create a copy</td>
@@ -162,6 +172,21 @@
 					<td>Ctrl+Shift+G</td>
 					<td>Ungroup the selected group of objects.</td>
 				</tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Select the next object</td>
+                    <td>Tab</td>
+                    <td>Select the next object after the currently selected one.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Select the previous object</td>
+                    <td>Shift+Tab</td>
+                    <td>Select the previous object before the currently selected one.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Draw straight line or arrow</td>
+                    <td>Shift+drag (when drawing lines/arrows)</td>
+                    <td>Draw a straight vertical/horizontal/45-degree line or arrow.</td>
+                </tr>
 				<tr>
 					<th colspan="3">Modifying Objects</th>
 				</tr>
@@ -182,9 +207,43 @@
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Movement pixel by pixel</td>
-					<td>Ctrl</td>
+					<td>Ctrl+Arrow keys</td>
 					<td>Hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by one pixel at a time.</td>
 				</tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <th colspan="3"><a id="workwithtables"></a>Working with Tables</th>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Move to the next cell in a row</td>
+                    <td>Tab</td>
+                    <td>Go to the next cell in a table row.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Move to the previous cell in a row</td>
+                    <td>Shift+Tab</td>
+                    <td>Go to the previous cell in a table row.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Move to the next row</td>
+                    <td>Down arrow</td>
+                    <td>Go to the next row in a table.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Move to the previous row</td>
+                    <td>Up arrow</td>
+                    <td>Go to the previous row in a table.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Start new paragraph</td>
+                    <td>Enter</td>
+                    <td>Start a new paragraph within a cell.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Add new row</td>
+                    <td>Tab in the lower right table cell.</td>
+                    <td>Add a new row at the bottom of the table.</td>
+                </tr>
+                
 				<tr>
 					<th colspan="3"><a id="preview"></a>Previewing Presentation</th>
 				</tr>
@@ -195,17 +254,17 @@
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Navigate forward</td>
-					<td>ENTER, PAGE DOWN, RIGHT ARROW, DOWN ARROW, or SPACEBAR</td>
+					<td>Enter, Page Down, Right arrow, Down arrow, or Spacebar</td>
 					<td>Display the next transition effect or advance to the next slide.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Navigate backward</td>
-					<td>PAGE UP, LEFT ARROW, UP ARROW</td>
+					<td>Page Up, Left arrow, Up arrow</td>
 					<td>Display the previous transition effect or return to the previous slide.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Close preview</td>
-					<td>ESC</td>
+					<td>Esc</td>
 					<td>End a presentation.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
@@ -285,6 +344,36 @@
 					<td>Shift+End</td>
 					<td>Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the current line.</td>
 				</tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Select one character to the right</td>
+                    <td>Shift+Right arrow</td>
+                    <td>Select one character to the right of the cursor position.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Select one character to the left</td>
+                    <td>Shift+Left arrow</td>
+                    <td>Select one character to the left of the cursor position.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Select to the end of a word</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+Shift+Right arrow</td>
+                    <td>Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of a word.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Select to the beginning of a word</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+Shift+Left arrow</td>
+                    <td>Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of a word.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Select one line up</td>
+                    <td>Shift+Up arrow</td>
+                    <td>Select one line up (with the cursor at the beginning of a line).</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Select one line down</td>
+                    <td>Shift+Down arrow</td>
+                    <td>Select one line down (with the cursor at the beginning of a line).</td>
+                </tr>
 				<tr>
 					<th colspan="3">Text Styling</th>
 				</tr>
@@ -363,6 +452,79 @@
 					<td>Ctrl+Shift+M</td>
 					<td>Remove a paragraph indent from the left incrementally.</td>
 				</tr>-->
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Delete one character to the left</td>
+                    <td>Backspace</td>
+                    <td>Delete one character to the left of the cursor.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Delete one character to the right</td>
+                    <td>Delete</td>
+                    <td>Delete one character to the right of the cursor.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <th colspan="3">Moving around in text</th>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Move one character to the left</td>
+                    <td>Left arrow</td>
+                    <td>Move the cursor one character to the left.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Move one character to the right</td>
+                    <td>Right arrow</td>
+                    <td>Move the cursor one character to the right.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Move one line up</td>
+                    <td>Up arrow</td>
+                    <td>Move the cursor one line up.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Move one line down</td>
+                    <td>Down arrow</td>
+                    <td>Move the cursor one line down.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Move to the beginning of a word or one word to the left</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+Left arrow</td>
+                    <td>Move the cursor to the beginning of a word or one word to the left.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Move one word to the right</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+Right arrow</td>
+                    <td>Move the cursor one word to the right.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <!--<tr>
+                <td>One paragraph up</td>
+                <td>Ctrl+Up arrow</td>
+                <td>Move the cursor one paragraph up.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                <td>One paragraph down</td>
+                <td>Ctrl+Down arrow</td>
+                <td>Move the cursor one paragraph down.</td>
+                </tr>-->
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Jump to the beginning of the line</td>
+                    <td>Home</td>
+                    <td>Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited line.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Jump to the end of the line</td>
+                    <td>End</td>
+                    <td>Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited line.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Jump to the beginning of the text box</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+Home</td>
+                    <td>Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited text box.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Jump to the end of the text box</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+End</td>
+                    <td>Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited text box.</td>
+                </tr>
 			</table>
 		</div>
 	</body>
diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm
index ed82aa0bc..9f4f4490c 100644
--- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm
+++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm
@@ -16,11 +16,11 @@
 		<h1>View Settings and Navigation Tools</h1>
 			<p><b>Presentation Editor</b> offers several tools to help you view and navigate through your presentation: zoom, previous/next slide buttons, slide number indicator.</p>
 			<h3>Adjust the View Settings</h3>
-			<p>To adjust default view settings and set the most convenient mode to work with the presentation, switch to the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar, click the <b>View settings</b> <img alt="View settings icon" src="../images/viewsettingsicon.png" /> icon at the upper left corner and select which interface elements you want to be hidden or shown.
+			<p>To adjust default view settings and set the most convenient mode to work with the presentation, click the <b>View settings</b> <img alt="View settings icon" src="../images/viewsettingsicon.png" /> icon on the right side of the editor header and select which interface elements you want to be hidden or shown.
 			You can select the following options from the <b>View settings</b> drop-down list:
 			</p>
 			<ul>
-			<li><b>Hide Toolbar</b> -  hides the top toolbar that contains commands while tabs remain visible. When this option is enabled, you can click any tab to display the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed until you click anywhere outside it. To disable this mode switch to the <b>Home</b> tab, then click the <b>View settings</b> <img alt="View settings icon" src="../images/viewsettingsicon.png" /> icon and click the <b>Hide Toolbar</b> option once again. The top toolbar will be displayed all the time. 
+			<li><b>Hide Toolbar</b> -  hides the top toolbar that contains commands while tabs remain visible. When this option is enabled, you can click any tab to display the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed until you click anywhere outside it. To disable this mode, click the <b>View settings</b> <img alt="View settings icon" src="../images/viewsettingsicon.png" /> icon and click the <b>Hide Toolbar</b> option once again. The top toolbar will be displayed all the time. 
                 <p class="note"><b>Note</b>: alternatively, you can just double-click any tab to hide the top toolbar or display it again.</p>
             </li>
 			<li><b>Hide Status Bar</b> - hides the bottommost bar where the <b>Slide Number Indicator</b> and <b>Zoom</b> buttons are situated. To show the hidden <b>Status Bar</b> click this option once again.</li>
diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm
index 1aac9fc19..bf5722add 100644
--- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm
+++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
         </div>
 		<h1>Search Function</h1>
 			<p><b>To search</b> for the needed characters, words or phrases used in the currently edited presentation, 
-			click the <img alt="Search icon" src="../images/searchicon.png" /> icon situated at the left sidebar.</p>
+			click the <img alt="Search icon" src="../images/searchicon.png" /> icon situated at the left sidebar or use the <em>Ctrl+F</em> key combination.</p>
 			<p>The <b>Search</b> window will open:</p>
 			<img alt="Search Window" src="../images/search_window.png" />
 			<ol>
diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm
index b228dbfdf..8394c5eb8 100644
--- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm
+++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm
@@ -23,8 +23,7 @@
                 <li>insert <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertText.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">text boxes</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">pictures</a>, <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">shapes</a>,</li>
                 <li><a href="../UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">align and arrange objects</a> on a slide,</li>
                 <li><a href="../UsageInstructions/CopyClearFormatting.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">copy/clear</a> text formatting,</li>
-                <li>change a <a href="../UsageInstructions/SetSlideParameters.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">theme, color scheme or slide size</a>,</li>
-                <li>adjust <a href="../HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">View Settings</a> and access the editor <a href="../HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Advanced Settings</a>.</li>
+                <li>change a <a href="../UsageInstructions/SetSlideParameters.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">theme, color scheme or slide size</a>.</li>
             </ul>
 		</div>
 	</body>
diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm
index bac1d3484..5ae379596 100644
--- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm
+++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
             <p><img alt="Editor window" src="../images/interface/editorwindow.png" /></p>
             <p>The editor interface consists of the following main elements:</p>
             <ol>
-                <li><b>Editor header</b> displays the logo, menu tabs, presentation name as well as two icons on the right that allow to <a href="../HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">set access rights</a> and return to the Documents list.
+                <li><b>Editor header</b> displays the logo, menu tabs, presentation name as well as three icons on the right that allow to <a href="../HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">set access rights</a>, return to the Documents list, adjust <a href="../HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">View Settings</a> and access the editor <a href="../HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Advanced Settings</a>.
                 <p><img alt="Icons in the editor header" src="../images/interface/rightpart.png" /></p>
                 </li>
                 <li><b>Top toolbar</b> displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: <a href="../ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">File</a>, <a href="../ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Home</a>, <a href="../ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Insert</a>, <a href="../ProgramInterface/CollaborationTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Collaboration</a>, <a href="../ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Plugins</a>.
diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm
index e91deec57..58d0d4254 100644
--- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm
+++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 				<li>click the <img alt="Hyperlink icon" src="../images/addhyperlink.png" /> <b>Hyperlink</b> icon at the top toolbar,</li>
 				<li>after that the <b>Hyperlink Settings</b> will appear where you can specify the hyperlink parameters:
 				<ul>
-				    <li><b>Link Type</b> select a link type you wish to insert from the drop-down list:
+				    <li>Select a link type you wish to insert:
 				    <ul>
 				    <li>Use the <b>External Link</b> option and enter a URL in the format http://www.example.com in the <b>Link to</b> field below if you need to add a hyperlink leading to an external website.
 				    <p><img alt="Hyperlink Settings window" src="../images/hyperlinkwindow.png" /></p>
@@ -37,10 +37,9 @@
 				</li>
 				<li>Click the <b>OK</b> button.</li>
 			</ol>
-			<p>To add a hyperlink, you can also click with the right mouse button at a position where a hyperlink will be added and select the <b>Hyperlink</b> option in the right-click menu or press the <b>Ctrl+K</b> key combination.</p>
-			<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: it's also possible to select a caracter, word or word combination with the mouse or <a href="../HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm#textselection" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">using the keyboard</a> and
-			click the <img alt="Hyperlink icon" src="../images/addhyperlink.png" /> <b>Hyperlink</b> icon at the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar or right-click the selection and choose the <b>Hyperlink</b> option in the menu. 
-			After that the window displayed above will open with the <b>Display</b> field filled with the text fragment you selected.</p>
+            <p>To add a hyperlink, you can also use the <b>Ctrl+K</b> key combination or click with the right mouse button at a position where a hyperlink will be added and select the <b>Hyperlink</b> option in the right-click menu.</p>
+			<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: it's also possible to select a character, word or word combination with the mouse or <a href="../HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm#textselection" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">using the keyboard</a> and
+                then open the <b>Hyperlink Settings</b> window as described above. In this case, the <b>Display</b> field will be filled with the text fragment you selected.</p>
 			<p>By hovering the cursor over the added hyperlink, the ScreenTip will appear containing the text you specified. 
 			You can follow the link by pressing the <b>CTRL</b> key and clicking the link in your presentation.</p>
 			<p>To edit or delete the added hyperlink, click it with the right mouse button, select the <b>Hyperlink</b> option in the right-click menu and then the action you want to perform - <b>Edit Hyperlink</b> or <b>Remove Hyperlink</b>.</p>
diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm
index 9cd370693..e8b52dd8a 100644
--- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm
+++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
 			<p>The right sidebar is activated when you left-click an image and choose the <b>Image settings</b> <img alt="Image settings icon" src="../images/image_settings_icon.png" /> icon on the right. It contains the following sections:</p>
             <img alt="Image Settings tab" src="../images/imagesettingstab.png" />
             <p><b>Size</b> - is used to view the current image <b>Width</b> and <b>Height</b> or restore the image <b>Default Size</b> if necessary.</p>
-			<p><b>Replace Image</b> - is used to load another image instead of the current one selecting the desired source. You can select one of the options: <b>From File</b> or <b>From URL</b>.</p>
+			<p><b>Replace Image</b> - is used to load another image instead of the current one selecting the desired source. You can select one of the options: <b>From File</b> or <b>From URL</b>. The <b>Replace image</b> option is also available in the right-click menu.</p>
             <p>When the image is selected, the <b>Shape settings</b> <img alt="Shape settings icon" src="../images/shape_settings_icon.png" /> icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the <b>Shape settings</b> tab at the right sidebar and adjust the shape <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm#shape_stroke" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)"><b>Stroke</b></a> type, size and color as well as change the shape type selecting another shape from the <b>Change Autoshape</b> menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly.</p>
             <p><img alt="Shape Settings tab" src="../images/right_image_shape.png" /></p>
 			<hr />
diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm
index a8c0247fd..86108a8b0 100644
--- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm
+++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm
@@ -34,6 +34,9 @@
             <p><img alt="Resize table" src="../images/resizetable.png" /></p>
             <p>You can also manually change the width of a certain column or the height of a row. Move the mouse cursor over the right border of the column so that the cursor turns into the bidirectional arrow <img alt="Mouse Cursor when changing column width" src="../images/changecolumnwidth.png" /> and drag the border to the left or right to set the necessary width. To change the height of a single row manually, move the mouse cursor over the bottom border of the row until the cursor turns into the bidirectional arrow <img alt="Mouse Cursor when changing row height" src="../images/changerowheight.png" /> and drag it up or down.</p>
 			<p>You can specify the <a href="../UsageInstructions/ManipulateObjects.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">table position</a> on the slide dragging it vertically or horizontally.</p>
+            <p class="note">
+                <b>Note</b>: to move around in a table you can use <a href="../HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm#workwithtables" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">keyboard shortcuts</a>.
+            </p>
 			<hr />
             <h3>Adjust table settings</h3>
 			<img class="floatleft"alt="Table settings tab" src="../images/tablesettingstab.png" />
diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ManipulateObjects.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ManipulateObjects.htm
index 86a6a9916..5d64cecc4 100644
--- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ManipulateObjects.htm
+++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ManipulateObjects.htm
@@ -15,7 +15,10 @@
         </div>
 			<h1>Manipulate objects on a slide</h1>
 			<p>You can resize, move, rotate different objects on a slide manually using the special handles. You can also specify the dimensions and position of some objects exactly using the right sidebar or <b>Advanced Settings</b> window.</p>			
-			<h3>Resize objects</h3>
+            <p class="note">
+                <b>Note</b>: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available <a href="../HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm#workwithobjects" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">here</a>.
+            </p>
+            <h3>Resize objects</h3>
 			<p>To change the <b>autoshape/image/chart/table/text box</b> size, drag small squares <img alt="Square icon" src="../images/resize_square.png" /> situated on the object edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected object while resizing, hold down the <b>Shift</b> key and drag one of the corner icons.</p>
 			<p><img alt="Maintaining proportions" src="../images/maintain_proportions.png" /></p>
 			<p>To specify the precise width and height of a <b>chart</b>, select it on a slide and use the <b>Size</b> section of the right sidebar that will be activated.</p>
diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm
index 1b354fab1..91f18af9d 100644
--- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm
+++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
                 <ol>
                     <li>click the <b>File</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
                     <li>select the <b>Download as</b> option,</li>
-                    <li>choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: PDF, PPTX, or ODP.</li>
+                    <li>choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: PPTX, PDF, or ODP.</li>
                 </ol>
             </div>
         </div>
diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/hyperlinkwindow.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/hyperlinkwindow.png
index 8f28e5e3b..67599c7f0 100644
Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/hyperlinkwindow.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/hyperlinkwindow.png differ
diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/hyperlinkwindow2.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/hyperlinkwindow2.png
index 81c2d0877..d16ba8c00 100644
Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/hyperlinkwindow2.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/hyperlinkwindow2.png differ
diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png
index 687e35e4a..c033c927c 100644
Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png differ
diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png
index 0da01eb70..1754c5b9b 100644
Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png differ
diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png
index 871ee1088..5a0d5bc66 100644
Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png differ
diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png
index c354db457..fa2ec58a5 100644
Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png differ
diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png
index 6ce96e8df..facfd9718 100644
Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png differ
diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png
index d94811ead..ea5c0282f 100644
Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png differ
diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/rightpart.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/rightpart.png
index 469796a3e..7b6b37ca4 100644
Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/rightpart.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/rightpart.png differ
diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/viewsettingsicon.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/viewsettingsicon.png
index ff2feb799..50ce274cf 100644
Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/viewsettingsicon.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/viewsettingsicon.png differ
diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js
index 7da585849..2de552160 100644
--- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js
+++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js
@@ -3,12 +3,12 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "HelpfulHints/About.htm", 
         "title": "About Presentation Editor", 
-        "body": "Presentation Editor is an online application that lets you look through and edit presentations directly in your browser . Using Presentation Editor, you can perform various editing operations like in any desktop editor, print the edited presentations keeping all the formatting details or download them onto your computer hard disk drive as PDF, PPTX, or ODP files. To view the current software version and licensor details, click the icon at the left sidebar."
+        "body": "Presentation Editor is an online application that lets you look through and edit presentations directly in your browser . Using Presentation Editor, you can perform various editing operations like in any desktop editor, print the edited presentations keeping all the formatting details or download them onto your computer hard disk drive as PPTX, PDF, or ODP files. To view the current software version and licensor details, click the icon at the left sidebar."
     },
    {
         "id": "HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm", 
         "title": "Advanced Settings of Presentation Editor", 
-        "body": "Presentation Editor lets you change its advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab at the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings... option. You can also use the icon in the right upper corner at the Home tab of the top toolbar. The advanced settings are: Spell Checking is used to turn on/off the spell checking option. Alternate Input is used to turn on/off hieroglyphs. Alignment Guides is used to turn on/off alignment guides that appear when you move objects and allow you to position them on the slide precisely. Autosave is used to turn on/off automatic saving of changes you make while editing. Co-editing Mode is used to select the display of the changes made during the co-editing: By default the Fast mode is selected, the users who take part in the document co-editing will see the changes in realtime once they are made by other users. If you prefer not to see other user changes (so that they do not disturb you, or for some other reason), select the Strict mode and all the changes will be shown only after you click the Save icon notifying you that there are changes from other users. Default Zoom Value is used to set the default zoom value selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 200%. You can also choose the Fit to Slide or Fit to Width option. Unit of Measurement is used to specify what units are used on the rulers and in properties windows for measuring elements parameters such as width, height, spacing, margins etc. You can select the Centimeter, Point, or Inch option. To save the changes you made, click the Apply button."
+        "body": "Presentation Editor lets you change its advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab at the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings... option. You can also click the View settings icon on the right side of the editor header and select the Advanced settings option. The advanced settings are: Spell Checking is used to turn on/off the spell checking option. Alternate Input is used to turn on/off hieroglyphs. Alignment Guides is used to turn on/off alignment guides that appear when you move objects and allow you to position them on the slide precisely. Autosave is used to turn on/off automatic saving of changes you make while editing. Co-editing Mode is used to select the display of the changes made during the co-editing: By default the Fast mode is selected, the users who take part in the document co-editing will see the changes in realtime once they are made by other users. If you prefer not to see other user changes (so that they do not disturb you, or for some other reason), select the Strict mode and all the changes will be shown only after you click the Save icon notifying you that there are changes from other users. Default Zoom Value is used to set the default zoom value selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 200%. You can also choose the Fit to Slide or Fit to Width option. Unit of Measurement is used to specify what units are used on the rulers and in properties windows for measuring elements parameters such as width, height, spacing, margins etc. You can select the Centimeter, Point, or Inch option. To save the changes you made, click the Apply button."
     },
    {
         "id": "HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm", 
@@ -18,17 +18,17 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm", 
         "title": "Keyboard Shortcuts", 
-        "body": "Working with Presentation Open 'File' panel Alt+F Open the File panel to save, download, print the current presentation, view its info, create a new presentation or open an existing one, access Presentation Editor help or advanced settings. Open 'Search' panel Ctrl+F Open the Search panel to start searching for a character/word/phrase in the currently edited presentation. Open 'Comments' panel Ctrl+Shift+H Open the Comments panel to add your own comment or reply to other users' comments. Open comment field Alt+H Open a data entry field where you can add the text of your comment. Open 'Chat' panel Alt+Q Open the Chat panel and send a message. Save presentation Ctrl+S Save all the changes to the presentation currently edited with Presentation Editor. Print presentation Ctrl+P Print the presentation with one of the available printers or save it to a file. Download As... Ctrl+Shift+S Save the currently edited presentation to the computer hard disk drive in one of the supported formats: PDF, PPTX, ODP. Full screen F11 Switch to the full screen view to fit Presentation Editor into your screen. Help menu F1 Open Presentation Editor Help menu. Navigation The first slide Home Go to the first slide of the currently edited presentation. The last slide End Go to the last slide of the currently edited presentation. Next slide PgDn Go to the next slide of the currently edited presentation. Previous slide PgUp Go to the previous slide of the currently edited presentation. Select the next shape Tab Select the next shape after the currently selected one. Select the previous shape Shift+Tab Select the previous shape before the currently selected one. Zoom In Ctrl+plus (+) Zoom in the currently edited presentation. Zoom Out Ctrl+minus (-) Zoom out the currently edited presentation. Performing Actions on Slides New slide Ctrl+M Create a new slide and add it after the selected one in the list. Duplicate slide Ctrl+D Duplicate the selected slide in the list. Move slide up Ctrl+Up ARROW Move the selected slide above the previous one in the list. Move slide down Ctrl+Down ARROW Move the selected slide below the following one in the list. Move slide to beginning Ctrl+Shift+Up ARROW Move the selected slide to the very first position in the list. Move slide to end Ctrl+Shift+Down ARROW Move the selected slide to the very last position in the list. Performing Actions on Objects Create a copy Ctrl+drag or Ctrl+D Hold down the Ctrl key when dragging the selected object or press Ctrl+D to create its copy. Group Ctrl+G Group the selected objects. Ungroup Ctrl+Shift+G Ungroup the selected group of objects. Modifying Objects Constrain movement Shift+drag Constrain the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. Set 15-degree-rotation Shift+drag (when rotating) Constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments. Maintain proportions Shift+drag (when resizing) Maintain the proportions of the selected object when resizing. Movement pixel by pixel Ctrl Hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by one pixel at a time. Previewing Presentation Start preview from the beginning Ctrl+F5 Start a presentation from the beginning. Navigate forward ENTER, PAGE DOWN, RIGHT ARROW, DOWN ARROW, or SPACEBAR Display the next transition effect or advance to the next slide. Navigate backward PAGE UP, LEFT ARROW, UP ARROW Display the previous transition effect or return to the previous slide. Close preview ESC End a presentation. Undo and Redo Undo Ctrl+Z Reverse the latest performed action. Redo Ctrl+Y Repeat the latest undone action. Cut, Copy, and Paste Cut Ctrl+X, Shift+Delete Cut the selected object and send it to the computer clipboard memory. The cut object can be later inserted to another place in the same presentation. Copy Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert Send the selected object to the computer clipboard memory. The copied object can be later inserted to another place in the same presentation. Paste Ctrl+V, Shift+Insert Insert the previously copied object from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The object can be previously copied from the same presentation. Insert hyperlink Ctrl+K Insert a hyperlink which can be used to go to a web address or to a certain slide in the presentation. Copy style Ctrl+Shift+C Copy the formatting from the selected fragment of the currently edited text. The copied formatting can be later applied to another text fragment in the same presentation. Apply style Ctrl+Shift+V Apply the previously copied formatting to the text in the currently edited text box. Selecting with the Mouse Add to the selected fragment Shift Start the selection, hold down the Shift key and click where you need to end the selection. Selecting using the Keyboard Select all Ctrl+A Select all the slides (in the slides list) or all the objects within the slide (in the slide editing area) or all the text (within the text box) - depending on where the mouse cursor is located. Select text fragment Shift+Arrow Select the text character by character. Select text from cursor to beginning of line Shift+Home Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the current line. Select text from cursor to end of line Shift+End Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the current line. Text Styling Bold Ctrl+B Make the font of the selected text fragment bold giving it more weight. Italic Ctrl+I Make the font of the selected text fragment italicized giving it some right side tilt. Underline Ctrl+U Make the selected text fragment underlined with the line going under the letters. Subscript Ctrl+dot (.) Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Superscript Ctrl+comma (,) Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Bulleted list Ctrl+Shift+L Create an unordered bulleted list from the selected text fragment or start a new one. Remove formatting Ctrl+Spacebar Remove formatting from the selected text fragment. Increase font Ctrl+] Increase the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Decrease font Ctrl+[ Decrease the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Align center/left Ctrl+E Switch a paragraph between centered and left-aligned. Align justified/left Ctrl+J Switch a paragraph between justified and left-aligned. Align right/left Ctrl+R Switch a paragraph between right-aligned and left-aligned. Align left Ctrl+L Align left with the text lined up by the left side of the text box, the right side remains unaligned."
+        "body": "Working with Presentation Open 'File' panel Alt+F Open the File panel to save, download, print the current presentation, view its info, create a new presentation or open an existing one, access Presentation Editor help or advanced settings. Open 'Search' dialog box Ctrl+F Open the Search dialog box to start searching for a character/word/phrase in the currently edited presentation. Open 'Comments' panel Ctrl+Shift+H Open the Comments panel to add your own comment or reply to other users' comments. Open comment field Alt+H Open a data entry field where you can add the text of your comment. Open 'Chat' panel Alt+Q Open the Chat panel and send a message. Save presentation Ctrl+S Save all the changes to the presentation currently edited with Presentation Editor. The active file will be saved with its current file name, location, and file format. Print presentation Ctrl+P Print the presentation with one of the available printers or save it to a file. Download As... Ctrl+Shift+S Open the Download as... panel to save the currently edited presentation to the computer hard disk drive in one of the supported formats: PPTX, PDF, ODP. Full screen F11 Switch to the full screen view to fit Presentation Editor into your screen. Help menu F1 Open Presentation Editor Help menu. Open existing file Ctrl+O On the Open local file tab in desktop editors, opens the standard dialog box that allows to select an existing file. Element contextual menu Shift+F10 Open the selected element contextual menu. Close file Ctrl+W Close the selected presentation window. Close the window (tab) Ctrl+F4 Close the tab in a browser. Navigation The first slide Home Go to the first slide of the currently edited presentation. The last slide End Go to the last slide of the currently edited presentation. Next slide Page Down Go to the next slide of the currently edited presentation. Previous slide Page Up Go to the previous slide of the currently edited presentation. Zoom In Ctrl+Plus sign (+) Zoom in the currently edited presentation. Zoom Out Ctrl+Minus sign (-) Zoom out the currently edited presentation. Performing Actions on Slides New slide Ctrl+M Create a new slide and add it after the selected one in the list. Duplicate slide Ctrl+D Duplicate the selected slide in the list. Move slide up Ctrl+Up Arrow Move the selected slide above the previous one in the list. Move slide down Ctrl+Down Arrow Move the selected slide below the following one in the list. Move slide to beginning Ctrl+Shift+Up Arrow Move the selected slide to the very first position in the list. Move slide to end Ctrl+Shift+Down Arrow Move the selected slide to the very last position in the list. Performing Actions on Objects Create a copy Ctrl+drag or Ctrl+D Hold down the Ctrl key when dragging the selected object or press Ctrl+D to create its copy. Group Ctrl+G Group the selected objects. Ungroup Ctrl+Shift+G Ungroup the selected group of objects. Select the next object Tab Select the next object after the currently selected one. Select the previous object Shift+Tab Select the previous object before the currently selected one. Draw straight line or arrow Shift+drag (when drawing lines/arrows) Draw a straight vertical/horizontal/45-degree line or arrow. Modifying Objects Constrain movement Shift+drag Constrain the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. Set 15-degree-rotation Shift+drag (when rotating) Constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments. Maintain proportions Shift+drag (when resizing) Maintain the proportions of the selected object when resizing. Movement pixel by pixel Ctrl+Arrow keys Hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by one pixel at a time. Working with Tables Move to the next cell in a row Tab Go to the next cell in a table row. Move to the previous cell in a row Shift+Tab Go to the previous cell in a table row. Move to the next row Down arrow Go to the next row in a table. Move to the previous row Up arrow Go to the previous row in a table. Start new paragraph Enter Start a new paragraph within a cell. Add new row Tab in the lower right table cell. Add a new row at the bottom of the table. Previewing Presentation Start preview from the beginning Ctrl+F5 Start a presentation from the beginning. Navigate forward Enter, Page Down, Right arrow, Down arrow, or Spacebar Display the next transition effect or advance to the next slide. Navigate backward Page Up, Left arrow, Up arrow Display the previous transition effect or return to the previous slide. Close preview Esc End a presentation. Undo and Redo Undo Ctrl+Z Reverse the latest performed action. Redo Ctrl+Y Repeat the latest undone action. Cut, Copy, and Paste Cut Ctrl+X, Shift+Delete Cut the selected object and send it to the computer clipboard memory. The cut object can be later inserted to another place in the same presentation. Copy Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert Send the selected object to the computer clipboard memory. The copied object can be later inserted to another place in the same presentation. Paste Ctrl+V, Shift+Insert Insert the previously copied object from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The object can be previously copied from the same presentation. Insert hyperlink Ctrl+K Insert a hyperlink which can be used to go to a web address or to a certain slide in the presentation. Copy style Ctrl+Shift+C Copy the formatting from the selected fragment of the currently edited text. The copied formatting can be later applied to another text fragment in the same presentation. Apply style Ctrl+Shift+V Apply the previously copied formatting to the text in the currently edited text box. Selecting with the Mouse Add to the selected fragment Shift Start the selection, hold down the Shift key and click where you need to end the selection. Selecting using the Keyboard Select all Ctrl+A Select all the slides (in the slides list) or all the objects within the slide (in the slide editing area) or all the text (within the text box) - depending on where the mouse cursor is located. Select text fragment Shift+Arrow Select the text character by character. Select text from cursor to beginning of line Shift+Home Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the current line. Select text from cursor to end of line Shift+End Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the current line. Select one character to the right Shift+Right arrow Select one character to the right of the cursor position. Select one character to the left Shift+Left arrow Select one character to the left of the cursor position. Select to the end of a word Ctrl+Shift+Right arrow Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of a word. Select to the beginning of a word Ctrl+Shift+Left arrow Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of a word. Select one line up Shift+Up arrow Select one line up (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Select one line down Shift+Down arrow Select one line down (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Text Styling Bold Ctrl+B Make the font of the selected text fragment bold giving it more weight. Italic Ctrl+I Make the font of the selected text fragment italicized giving it some right side tilt. Underline Ctrl+U Make the selected text fragment underlined with the line going under the letters. Subscript Ctrl+dot (.) Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Superscript Ctrl+comma (,) Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Bulleted list Ctrl+Shift+L Create an unordered bulleted list from the selected text fragment or start a new one. Remove formatting Ctrl+Spacebar Remove formatting from the selected text fragment. Increase font Ctrl+] Increase the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Decrease font Ctrl+[ Decrease the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Align center/left Ctrl+E Switch a paragraph between centered and left-aligned. Align justified/left Ctrl+J Switch a paragraph between justified and left-aligned. Align right/left Ctrl+R Switch a paragraph between right-aligned and left-aligned. Align left Ctrl+L Align left with the text lined up by the left side of the text box, the right side remains unaligned. Delete one character to the left Backspace Delete one character to the left of the cursor. Delete one character to the right Delete Delete one character to the right of the cursor. Moving around in text Move one character to the left Left arrow Move the cursor one character to the left. Move one character to the right Right arrow Move the cursor one character to the right. Move one line up Up arrow Move the cursor one line up. Move one line down Down arrow Move the cursor one line down. Move to the beginning of a word or one word to the left Ctrl+Left arrow Move the cursor to the beginning of a word or one word to the left. Move one word to the right Ctrl+Right arrow Move the cursor one word to the right. Jump to the beginning of the line Home Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited line. Jump to the end of the line End Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited line. Jump to the beginning of the text box Ctrl+Home Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited text box. Jump to the end of the text box Ctrl+End Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited text box."
     },
    {
         "id": "HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm", 
         "title": "View Settings and Navigation Tools", 
-        "body": "Presentation Editor offers several tools to help you view and navigate through your presentation: zoom, previous/next slide buttons, slide number indicator. Adjust the View Settings To adjust default view settings and set the most convenient mode to work with the presentation, switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, click the View settings icon at the upper left corner and select which interface elements you want to be hidden or shown. You can select the following options from the View settings drop-down list: Hide Toolbar - hides the top toolbar that contains commands while tabs remain visible. When this option is enabled, you can click any tab to display the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed until you click anywhere outside it. To disable this mode switch to the Home tab, then click the View settings icon and click the Hide Toolbar option once again. The top toolbar will be displayed all the time. Note: alternatively, you can just double-click any tab to hide the top toolbar or display it again. Hide Status Bar - hides the bottommost bar where the Slide Number Indicator and Zoom buttons are situated. To show the hidden Status Bar click this option once again. Hide Rulers - hides rulers which are used to set up tab stops and paragraph indents within the text boxes. To show the hidden Rulers click this option once again. The right sidebar is minimized by default. To expand it, select any object/slide and click the icon of the currently activated tab on the right. To minimize the right sidebar, click the icon once again. The left sidebar width is adjusted by simple drag-and-drop: move the mouse cursor over the left sidebar border so that it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the left to reduce the sidebar width or to the right to extend it. Use the Navigation Tools To navigate through your presentation, use the following tools: The Zoom buttons are situated in the right lower corner and are used to zoom in and out the current presentation. To change the currently selected zoom value that is displayed in percent, click it and select one of the available zoom options from the list or use the Zoom in or Zoom out buttons. Click the Fit width icon to fit the slide width to the visible part of the working area. To fit the whole slide to the visible part of the working area, click the Fit slide icon. Zoom settings are also available in the View settings drop-down list that can be useful if you decide to hide the Status Bar. Note: you can set a default zoom value. Switch to the File tab of the top toolbar, go to the Advanced Settings... section, choose the necessary Default Zoom Value from the list and click the Apply button. To go to the previous or next slide when editing the presentation, you can use the and buttons at the top and bottom of the vertical scroll bar located to the right of the slide. The Slide Number Indicator shows the current slide as a part of all the slides in the current presentation (slide 'n' of 'nn'). Click this caption to open the window where you can enter the slide number and quickly go to it. If you decide to hide the Status Bar, this tool will become inaccessible."
+        "body": "Presentation Editor offers several tools to help you view and navigate through your presentation: zoom, previous/next slide buttons, slide number indicator. Adjust the View Settings To adjust default view settings and set the most convenient mode to work with the presentation, click the View settings icon on the right side of the editor header and select which interface elements you want to be hidden or shown. You can select the following options from the View settings drop-down list: Hide Toolbar - hides the top toolbar that contains commands while tabs remain visible. When this option is enabled, you can click any tab to display the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed until you click anywhere outside it. To disable this mode, click the View settings icon and click the Hide Toolbar option once again. The top toolbar will be displayed all the time. Note: alternatively, you can just double-click any tab to hide the top toolbar or display it again. Hide Status Bar - hides the bottommost bar where the Slide Number Indicator and Zoom buttons are situated. To show the hidden Status Bar click this option once again. Hide Rulers - hides rulers which are used to set up tab stops and paragraph indents within the text boxes. To show the hidden Rulers click this option once again. The right sidebar is minimized by default. To expand it, select any object/slide and click the icon of the currently activated tab on the right. To minimize the right sidebar, click the icon once again. The left sidebar width is adjusted by simple drag-and-drop: move the mouse cursor over the left sidebar border so that it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the left to reduce the sidebar width or to the right to extend it. Use the Navigation Tools To navigate through your presentation, use the following tools: The Zoom buttons are situated in the right lower corner and are used to zoom in and out the current presentation. To change the currently selected zoom value that is displayed in percent, click it and select one of the available zoom options from the list or use the Zoom in or Zoom out buttons. Click the Fit width icon to fit the slide width to the visible part of the working area. To fit the whole slide to the visible part of the working area, click the Fit slide icon. Zoom settings are also available in the View settings drop-down list that can be useful if you decide to hide the Status Bar. Note: you can set a default zoom value. Switch to the File tab of the top toolbar, go to the Advanced Settings... section, choose the necessary Default Zoom Value from the list and click the Apply button. To go to the previous or next slide when editing the presentation, you can use the and buttons at the top and bottom of the vertical scroll bar located to the right of the slide. The Slide Number Indicator shows the current slide as a part of all the slides in the current presentation (slide 'n' of 'nn'). Click this caption to open the window where you can enter the slide number and quickly go to it. If you decide to hide the Status Bar, this tool will become inaccessible."
     },
    {
         "id": "HelpfulHints/Search.htm", 
         "title": "Search Function", 
-        "body": "To search for the needed characters, words or phrases used in the currently edited presentation, click the icon situated at the left sidebar. The Search window will open: Type in your inquiry into the corresponding data entry field. Click one of the arrow buttons on the right. The search will be performed either towards the beginning of the presentation (if you click the button) or towards the end of the presentation (if you click the button) from the current position. The first slide in the selected direction that contains the characters you entered will be highlighted in the slide list and displayed in the working area with the required characters outlined. If it is not the slide you are looking for, click the selected button again to find the next slide containing the characters you entered."
+        "body": "To search for the needed characters, words or phrases used in the currently edited presentation, click the icon situated at the left sidebar or use the Ctrl+F key combination. The Search window will open: Type in your inquiry into the corresponding data entry field. Click one of the arrow buttons on the right. The search will be performed either towards the beginning of the presentation (if you click the button) or towards the end of the presentation (if you click the button) from the current position. The first slide in the selected direction that contains the characters you entered will be highlighted in the slide list and displayed in the working area with the required characters outlined. If it is not the slide you are looking for, click the selected button again to find the next slide containing the characters you entered."
     },
    {
         "id": "HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm", 
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm", 
         "title": "Home tab", 
-        "body": "The Home tab opens by default when you open a presentation. It allows to set general slide parameters, format text, insert some objects, align and arrange them. Using this tab, you can: manage slides and start slideshow, format text within a text box, insert text boxes, pictures, shapes, align and arrange objects on a slide, copy/clear text formatting, change a theme, color scheme or slide size, adjust View Settings and access the editor Advanced Settings."
+        "body": "The Home tab opens by default when you open a presentation. It allows to set general slide parameters, format text, insert some objects, align and arrange them. Using this tab, you can: manage slides and start slideshow, format text within a text box, insert text boxes, pictures, shapes, align and arrange objects on a slide, copy/clear text formatting, change a theme, color scheme or slide size."
     },
    {
         "id": "ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm", 
@@ -68,12 +68,12 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", 
         "title": "Introducing the Presentation Editor user interface", 
-        "body": "Presentation Editor uses a tabbed interface where editing commands are grouped into tabs by functionality. The editor interface consists of the following main elements: Editor header displays the logo, menu tabs, presentation name as well as two icons on the right that allow to set access rights and return to the Documents list. Top toolbar displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: File, Home, Insert, Collaboration, Plugins. The Print, Save, Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo and Add Slide options are always available at the left part of the Top toolbar regardless of the selected tab. Status bar at the bottom of the editor window contains the Start slideshow icon, some navigation tools: slide number indicator and zoom buttons. The Status bar also displays some notifications (such as \"All changes saved\" etc.) and allows to set text language and enable spell checking. Left sidebar contains icons that allow to use the Search tool, minimize/expand the slide list, open the Comments and Chat panel, contact our support team and view the information about the program. Right sidebar allows to adjust additional parameters of different objects. When you select a particular object on a slide, the corresponding icon is activated at the right sidebar. Click this icon to expand the right sidebar. Horizontal and vertical Rulers help you place objects on a slide and allow to set up tab stops and paragraph indents within the text boxes. Working area allows to view presentation content, enter and edit data. Scroll bar on the right allows to scroll the presentation up and down. For your convenience you can hide some components and display them again when it is necessary. To learn more on how to adjust view settings please refer to this page."
+        "body": "Presentation Editor uses a tabbed interface where editing commands are grouped into tabs by functionality. The editor interface consists of the following main elements: Editor header displays the logo, menu tabs, presentation name as well as three icons on the right that allow to set access rights, return to the Documents list, adjust View Settings and access the editor Advanced Settings. Top toolbar displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: File, Home, Insert, Collaboration, Plugins. The Print, Save, Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo and Add Slide options are always available at the left part of the Top toolbar regardless of the selected tab. Status bar at the bottom of the editor window contains the Start slideshow icon, some navigation tools: slide number indicator and zoom buttons. The Status bar also displays some notifications (such as \"All changes saved\" etc.) and allows to set text language and enable spell checking. Left sidebar contains icons that allow to use the Search tool, minimize/expand the slide list, open the Comments and Chat panel, contact our support team and view the information about the program. Right sidebar allows to adjust additional parameters of different objects. When you select a particular object on a slide, the corresponding icon is activated at the right sidebar. Click this icon to expand the right sidebar. Horizontal and vertical Rulers help you place objects on a slide and allow to set up tab stops and paragraph indents within the text boxes. Working area allows to view presentation content, enter and edit data. Scroll bar on the right allows to scroll the presentation up and down. For your convenience you can hide some components and display them again when it is necessary. To learn more on how to adjust view settings please refer to this page."
     },
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm", 
         "title": "Add hyperlinks", 
-        "body": "To add a hyperlink, place the cursor to a position within the text box where a hyperlink will be added, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Hyperlink icon at the top toolbar, after that the Hyperlink Settings will appear where you can specify the hyperlink parameters: Link Type select a link type you wish to insert from the drop-down list: Use the External Link option and enter a URL in the format http://www.example.com in the Link to field below if you need to add a hyperlink leading to an external website. Use the Slide In This Presentation option and select one of the options below if you need to add a hyperlink leading to a certain slide in the same presentation. You can check one of the following radiobuttons: Next Slide, Previous Slide, First Slide, Last Slide, Slide with the specified number. Display - enter a text that will get clickable and lead to the web address/slide specified in the upper field. ScreenTip text - enter a text that will become visible in a small pop-up window that provides a brief note or label pertaining to the hyperlink being pointed to. Click the OK button. To add a hyperlink, you can also click with the right mouse button at a position where a hyperlink will be added and select the Hyperlink option in the right-click menu or press the Ctrl+K key combination. Note: it's also possible to select a caracter, word or word combination with the mouse or using the keyboard and click the Hyperlink icon at the Insert tab of the top toolbar or right-click the selection and choose the Hyperlink option in the menu. After that the window displayed above will open with the Display field filled with the text fragment you selected. By hovering the cursor over the added hyperlink, the ScreenTip will appear containing the text you specified. You can follow the link by pressing the CTRL key and clicking the link in your presentation. To edit or delete the added hyperlink, click it with the right mouse button, select the Hyperlink option in the right-click menu and then the action you want to perform - Edit Hyperlink or Remove Hyperlink."
+        "body": "To add a hyperlink, place the cursor to a position within the text box where a hyperlink will be added, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Hyperlink icon at the top toolbar, after that the Hyperlink Settings will appear where you can specify the hyperlink parameters: Select a link type you wish to insert: Use the External Link option and enter a URL in the format http://www.example.com in the Link to field below if you need to add a hyperlink leading to an external website. Use the Slide In This Presentation option and select one of the options below if you need to add a hyperlink leading to a certain slide in the same presentation. You can check one of the following radiobuttons: Next Slide, Previous Slide, First Slide, Last Slide, Slide with the specified number. Display - enter a text that will get clickable and lead to the web address/slide specified in the upper field. ScreenTip text - enter a text that will become visible in a small pop-up window that provides a brief note or label pertaining to the hyperlink being pointed to. Click the OK button. To add a hyperlink, you can also use the Ctrl+K key combination or click with the right mouse button at a position where a hyperlink will be added and select the Hyperlink option in the right-click menu. Note: it's also possible to select a character, word or word combination with the mouse or using the keyboard and then open the Hyperlink Settings window as described above. In this case, the Display field will be filled with the text fragment you selected. By hovering the cursor over the added hyperlink, the ScreenTip will appear containing the text you specified. You can follow the link by pressing the CTRL key and clicking the link in your presentation. To edit or delete the added hyperlink, click it with the right mouse button, select the Hyperlink option in the right-click menu and then the action you want to perform - Edit Hyperlink or Remove Hyperlink."
     },
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm", 
@@ -123,12 +123,12 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm", 
         "title": "Insert and adjust images", 
-        "body": "Insert an image In Presentation Editor, you can insert images in the most popular formats into your presentation. The following image formats are supported: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. To add an image on a slide, in the slide list on the left, select the slide you want to add the image to, click the Picture icon at the Home or Insert tab of the top toolbar, select one of the following options to load the image: the Picture from File option will open the standard Windows dialog window for file selection. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary file and click the Open button the Picture from URL option will open the window where you can enter the necessary image web address and click the OK button once the image is added you can change its size and position. Adjust image settings The right sidebar is activated when you left-click an image and choose the Image settings icon on the right. It contains the following sections: Size - is used to view the current image Width and Height or restore the image Default Size if necessary. Replace Image - is used to load another image instead of the current one selecting the desired source. You can select one of the options: From File or From URL. When the image is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab at the right sidebar and adjust the shape Stroke type, size and color as well as change the shape type selecting another shape from the Change Autoshape menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly. To change the advanced settings of the image, right-click the image and select the Image Advanced Settings option from the contextual menu or left-click the image and press the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The image properties window will be opened: The Placement tab allows you to set the following image properties: Size - use this option to change the image width and/or height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. To restore the default size of the added image, click the Default Size button. Position - use this option to change the image position on the slide (the position is calculated from the top and the left side of the slide). The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image. To delete the inserted image, left-click it and press the Delete key on the keyboard. To learn how to align an image on the slide or arrange several images, refer to the Align and arrange objects on a slide section."
+        "body": "Insert an image In Presentation Editor, you can insert images in the most popular formats into your presentation. The following image formats are supported: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. To add an image on a slide, in the slide list on the left, select the slide you want to add the image to, click the Picture icon at the Home or Insert tab of the top toolbar, select one of the following options to load the image: the Picture from File option will open the standard Windows dialog window for file selection. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary file and click the Open button the Picture from URL option will open the window where you can enter the necessary image web address and click the OK button once the image is added you can change its size and position. Adjust image settings The right sidebar is activated when you left-click an image and choose the Image settings icon on the right. It contains the following sections: Size - is used to view the current image Width and Height or restore the image Default Size if necessary. Replace Image - is used to load another image instead of the current one selecting the desired source. You can select one of the options: From File or From URL. The Replace image option is also available in the right-click menu. When the image is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab at the right sidebar and adjust the shape Stroke type, size and color as well as change the shape type selecting another shape from the Change Autoshape menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly. To change the advanced settings of the image, right-click the image and select the Image Advanced Settings option from the contextual menu or left-click the image and press the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The image properties window will be opened: The Placement tab allows you to set the following image properties: Size - use this option to change the image width and/or height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. To restore the default size of the added image, click the Default Size button. Position - use this option to change the image position on the slide (the position is calculated from the top and the left side of the slide). The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image. To delete the inserted image, left-click it and press the Delete key on the keyboard. To learn how to align an image on the slide or arrange several images, refer to the Align and arrange objects on a slide section."
     },
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertTables.htm", 
         "title": "Insert and format tables", 
-        "body": "Insert a table To insert a table onto a slide, select the slide where a table will be added, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Table icon at the top toolbar, select the option to create a table: either a table with predefined number of cells (10 by 8 cells maximum) If you want to quickly add a table, just select the number of rows (8 maximum) and columns (10 maximum). or a custom table In case you need more than 10 by 8 cell table, select the Insert Custom Table option that will open the window where you can enter the necessary number of rows and columns respectively, then click the OK button. once the table is added you can change its properties and position. To resize a table, drag the handles situated on its edges until the table reaches the necessary size. You can also manually change the width of a certain column or the height of a row. Move the mouse cursor over the right border of the column so that the cursor turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the left or right to set the necessary width. To change the height of a single row manually, move the mouse cursor over the bottom border of the row until the cursor turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag it up or down. You can specify the table position on the slide dragging it vertically or horizontally. Adjust table settings Most of the table properties as well as its structure can be altered using the right sidebar. To activate it click the table and choose the Table settings icon on the right. The Rows and Columns sections on the top allow you to emphasize certain rows/columns applying a specific formatting to them, or highlight different rows/columns with the different background colors to clearly distinguish them. The following options are available: Header - emphasizes the topmost row in the table with a special formatting. Total - emphasizes the bottommost row in the table with a special formatting. Banded - enables the background color alternation for odd and even rows. First - emphasizes the leftmost column in the table with a special formatting. Last - emphasizes the rightmost column in the table with a special formatting. Banded - enables the background color alternation for odd and even columns. The Select From Template section allows you to choose one of the predefined tables styles. Each template combines certain formatting parameters, such as a background color, border style, row/column banding etc. Depending on the options checked in the Rows and/or Columns sections above, the templates set will be displayed differently. For example, if you've checked the Header option in the Rows section and the Banded option in the Columns section, the displayed templates list will include only templates with the header row and banded columns enabled: The Borders Style section allows you to change the applied formatting that corresponds to the selected template. You can select the entire table or a certain cells range you want to change the formatting for and set all the parameters manually. Border parameters - set the border width using the list (or choose the No borders option), select its Color in the available palettes and determine the way it will be displayed in the cells clicking on the icons: Background color - select the color for the background within the selected cells. The Rows & Columns section allows you to perform the following operations: Select a row, column, cell (depending on the cursor position), or the entire table. Insert a new row above or below the selected one as well as a new column to the left or to the right of the selected one. Delete a row, column (depending on the cursor position or the selection), or the entire table. Merge Cells - to merge previously selected cells into a single one. Split Cell... - to split any previously selected cell into a certain number of rows and columns. This option opens the following window: Enter the Number of Columns and Number of Rows that the selected cell should be split into and press OK. Note: the options of the Rows & Columns section are also accessible from the right-click menu. The Cell Size section is used to adjust the width and height of the currently selected cell. In this section, you can also Distribute rows so that all the selected cells have equal height or Distribute columns so that all the selected cells have equal width. The Distribute rows/columns options are also accessible from the right-click menu. To change the advanced table settings, click the table with the right mouse button and select the Table Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or click the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The table properties window will be opened: The Margins tab allows to set the space between the text within the cells and the cell border: enter necessary Cell Margins values manually, or check the Use default margins box to apply the predefined values (if necessary, they can also be adjusted). The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the table. To format the entered text within the table cells, you can use icons at the Home tab of the top toolbar. The right-click menu that appears when you click the table with the right mouse button includes two additional options: Cell vertical alignment - it allows you to set the preferred type of the text vertical alignment within the selected cells: Align Top, Align Center, or Align Bottom. Hyperlink - it allows you to insert a hyperlink into the selected cell."
+        "body": "Insert a table To insert a table onto a slide, select the slide where a table will be added, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Table icon at the top toolbar, select the option to create a table: either a table with predefined number of cells (10 by 8 cells maximum) If you want to quickly add a table, just select the number of rows (8 maximum) and columns (10 maximum). or a custom table In case you need more than 10 by 8 cell table, select the Insert Custom Table option that will open the window where you can enter the necessary number of rows and columns respectively, then click the OK button. once the table is added you can change its properties and position. To resize a table, drag the handles situated on its edges until the table reaches the necessary size. You can also manually change the width of a certain column or the height of a row. Move the mouse cursor over the right border of the column so that the cursor turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the left or right to set the necessary width. To change the height of a single row manually, move the mouse cursor over the bottom border of the row until the cursor turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag it up or down. You can specify the table position on the slide dragging it vertically or horizontally. Note: to move around in a table you can use keyboard shortcuts. Adjust table settings Most of the table properties as well as its structure can be altered using the right sidebar. To activate it click the table and choose the Table settings icon on the right. The Rows and Columns sections on the top allow you to emphasize certain rows/columns applying a specific formatting to them, or highlight different rows/columns with the different background colors to clearly distinguish them. The following options are available: Header - emphasizes the topmost row in the table with a special formatting. Total - emphasizes the bottommost row in the table with a special formatting. Banded - enables the background color alternation for odd and even rows. First - emphasizes the leftmost column in the table with a special formatting. Last - emphasizes the rightmost column in the table with a special formatting. Banded - enables the background color alternation for odd and even columns. The Select From Template section allows you to choose one of the predefined tables styles. Each template combines certain formatting parameters, such as a background color, border style, row/column banding etc. Depending on the options checked in the Rows and/or Columns sections above, the templates set will be displayed differently. For example, if you've checked the Header option in the Rows section and the Banded option in the Columns section, the displayed templates list will include only templates with the header row and banded columns enabled: The Borders Style section allows you to change the applied formatting that corresponds to the selected template. You can select the entire table or a certain cells range you want to change the formatting for and set all the parameters manually. Border parameters - set the border width using the list (or choose the No borders option), select its Color in the available palettes and determine the way it will be displayed in the cells clicking on the icons: Background color - select the color for the background within the selected cells. The Rows & Columns section allows you to perform the following operations: Select a row, column, cell (depending on the cursor position), or the entire table. Insert a new row above or below the selected one as well as a new column to the left or to the right of the selected one. Delete a row, column (depending on the cursor position or the selection), or the entire table. Merge Cells - to merge previously selected cells into a single one. Split Cell... - to split any previously selected cell into a certain number of rows and columns. This option opens the following window: Enter the Number of Columns and Number of Rows that the selected cell should be split into and press OK. Note: the options of the Rows & Columns section are also accessible from the right-click menu. The Cell Size section is used to adjust the width and height of the currently selected cell. In this section, you can also Distribute rows so that all the selected cells have equal height or Distribute columns so that all the selected cells have equal width. The Distribute rows/columns options are also accessible from the right-click menu. To change the advanced table settings, click the table with the right mouse button and select the Table Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or click the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The table properties window will be opened: The Margins tab allows to set the space between the text within the cells and the cell border: enter necessary Cell Margins values manually, or check the Use default margins box to apply the predefined values (if necessary, they can also be adjusted). The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the table. To format the entered text within the table cells, you can use icons at the Home tab of the top toolbar. The right-click menu that appears when you click the table with the right mouse button includes two additional options: Cell vertical alignment - it allows you to set the preferred type of the text vertical alignment within the selected cells: Align Top, Align Center, or Align Bottom. Hyperlink - it allows you to insert a hyperlink into the selected cell."
     },
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertText.htm", 
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/ManipulateObjects.htm", 
         "title": "Manipulate objects on a slide", 
-        "body": "You can resize, move, rotate different objects on a slide manually using the special handles. You can also specify the dimensions and position of some objects exactly using the right sidebar or Advanced Settings window. Resize objects To change the autoshape/image/chart/table/text box size, drag small squares situated on the object edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected object while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. To specify the precise width and height of a chart, select it on a slide and use the Size section of the right sidebar that will be activated. To specify the precise dimensions of an image or autoshape, right-click the necessary object on the slide and select the Image/Shape Advanced Settings option from the menu. Specify necessary values on the Size tab of the Advanced Settings window and press OK. Reshape autoshapes When modifying some shapes, for example Figured arrows or Callouts, the yellow diamond-shaped icon is also available. It allows to adjust some aspects of the shape, for example, the length of the head of an arrow. Move objects To alter the autoshape/image/chart/table/text box position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the object. Drag the object to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. To move the object by the one-pixel increments, hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows. To move the object strictly horizontally/vertically and prevent it from moving in a perpendicular direction, hold down the Shift key when dragging. To specify the precise position of an image, right-click it on a slide and select the Image Advanced Settings option from the menu. Specify necessary values in the Position section of the Advanced Settings window and press OK. Rotate objects To rotate an autoshape/image/text box, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating."
+        "body": "You can resize, move, rotate different objects on a slide manually using the special handles. You can also specify the dimensions and position of some objects exactly using the right sidebar or Advanced Settings window. Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. Resize objects To change the autoshape/image/chart/table/text box size, drag small squares situated on the object edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected object while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. To specify the precise width and height of a chart, select it on a slide and use the Size section of the right sidebar that will be activated. To specify the precise dimensions of an image or autoshape, right-click the necessary object on the slide and select the Image/Shape Advanced Settings option from the menu. Specify necessary values on the Size tab of the Advanced Settings window and press OK. Reshape autoshapes When modifying some shapes, for example Figured arrows or Callouts, the yellow diamond-shaped icon is also available. It allows to adjust some aspects of the shape, for example, the length of the head of an arrow. Move objects To alter the autoshape/image/chart/table/text box position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the object. Drag the object to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. To move the object by the one-pixel increments, hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows. To move the object strictly horizontally/vertically and prevent it from moving in a perpendicular direction, hold down the Shift key when dragging. To specify the precise position of an image, right-click it on a slide and select the Image Advanced Settings option from the menu. Specify necessary values in the Position section of the Advanced Settings window and press OK. Rotate objects To rotate an autoshape/image/text box, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating."
     },
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm", 
@@ -158,12 +158,12 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm", 
         "title": "Save/print/download your presentation", 
-        "body": "By default, Рresentation Editor automatically saves your file each 2 seconds when you work on it preventing your data loss in case of the unexpected program closing. If you co-edit the file in the Fast mode, the timer requests for updates 25 times a second and saves the changes if they have been made. When the file is being co-edited in the Strict mode, changes are automatically saved at 10-minute intervals. If you need, you can easily select the preferred co-editing mode or disable the Autosave feature on the Advanced Settings page. To save your current presentation manually, press the Save icon at the top toolbar, or use the Ctrl+S key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Save option. To print out the current presentation, click the Print icon at the top toolbar, or use the Ctrl+P key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Print option. After that a PDF file will be generated on the basis of the presentation. You can open and print it out, or save onto your computer hard disk drive or removable medium to print it out later. To download the resulting presentation onto your computer hard disk drive, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Download as option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: PDF, PPTX, or ODP."
+        "body": "By default, Рresentation Editor automatically saves your file each 2 seconds when you work on it preventing your data loss in case of the unexpected program closing. If you co-edit the file in the Fast mode, the timer requests for updates 25 times a second and saves the changes if they have been made. When the file is being co-edited in the Strict mode, changes are automatically saved at 10-minute intervals. If you need, you can easily select the preferred co-editing mode or disable the Autosave feature on the Advanced Settings page. To save your current presentation manually, press the Save icon at the top toolbar, or use the Ctrl+S key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Save option. To print out the current presentation, click the Print icon at the top toolbar, or use the Ctrl+P key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Print option. After that a PDF file will be generated on the basis of the presentation. You can open and print it out, or save onto your computer hard disk drive or removable medium to print it out later. To download the resulting presentation onto your computer hard disk drive, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Download as option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: PPTX, PDF, or ODP."
     },
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/SetSlideParameters.htm", 
         "title": "Set slide parameters", 
-        "body": "To customize your presentation, you can select a theme, color scheme, slide size and orientation for the entire presentation, change the background fill or slide layout for each separate slide, apply transitions between the slides. It's also possible to add explanatory notes to each slide that can be helpful when demonstrating the presentation in the Presenter mode. Themes allow you to quickly change the presentation design, notably the slides background appearance, predefined fonts for titles and texts and the color scheme that is used for the presentation elements. To select a theme for the presentation, click on the necessary predefined theme from the themes gallery on the right side of the top toolbar Home tab. The selected theme will be applied to all the slides if you have not previously selected certain slides to apply the theme to. To change the selected theme for one or more slides, you can right-click the selected slides in the list on the left (or right-click a slide in the editing area), select the Change Theme option from the contextual menu and choose the necessary theme. Color Schemes affect the predefined colors used for the presentation elements (fonts, lines, fills etc.) and allow you to maintain color consistency throughout the entire presentation. To change a color scheme, click the Change color scheme icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary scheme from the drop-down list. The selected scheme will be applied to all the slides. To change a slide size for all the slides in the presentation, click the Select slide size icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the drop-down list. You can select: one of the two quick-access presets - Standard (4:3) or Widescreen (16:9), the Advanced Settings option that opens the Slide Size Settings window where you can select one of the available presets or set a Custom size specifying the desired Width and Height values. The available presets are: Standard (4:3), Widescreen (16:9), Widescreen (16:10), Letter Paper (8.5x11 in), Ledger Paper (11x17 in), A3 Paper (297x420 mm), A4 Paper (210x297 mm), B4 (ICO) Paper (250x353 mm), B5 (ICO) Paper (176x250 mm), 35 mm Slides, Overhead, Banner. The Slide Orientation menu allows to change the currently selected orientation type. The default orientation type is Landscape that can be switched to Portrait. To change a background fill: in the slide list on the left, select the slides you want to apply the fill to. Or click at any blank space within the currently edited slide in the slide editing area to change the fill type for this separate slide. at the Slide settings tab of the right sidebar, select the necessary option: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color you want to apply to the selected slides. Gradient Fill - select this option to fill the slide with two colors which smoothly change from one to another. Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the slide background. Pattern - select this option to fill the slide with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. For more detailed information on these options please refer to the Fill objects and select colors section. Transitions help make your presentation more dynamic and keep your audience's attention. To apply a transition: in the slide list on the left, select the slides you want to apply a transition to, choose a transition in the Effect drop-down list on the Slide settings tab, Note: to open the Slide settings tab you can click the Slide settings icon on the right or right-click the slide in the slide editing area and select the Slide Settings option from the contextual menu. adjust the transition properties: choose a transition variation, duration and the way to advance slides, click the Apply to All Slides button if you want to apply the same transition to all slides in the presentation. For more detailed information on these options please refer to the Apply transitions section. To change a slide layout: in the slide list on the left, select the slides you want to apply a new layout to, click the Change slide layout icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the necessary layout from the menu. Alternatively, you can right-click the necessary slide in the list on the left or in the editing area, select the Change Layout option from the contextual menu and choose the necessary layout. Note: currently, the following layouts are available: Title, Title and Object, Section Header, Two Objects, Two Texts and Two Objects, Title Only, Blank, Title, Object and Caption, Picture and Caption, Vertical Text, Vertical Title and Text. To add notes to a slide: in the slide list on the left, select the slide you want to add a note to, click the Click to add notes caption below the slide editing area, type in the text of your note. Note: you can format the text using the icons at the Home tab of the top toolbar. When you start the slideshow in the Presenter mode, you will be able to see all the slide notes below the slide preview area."
+        "body": "To customize your presentation, you can select a theme, color scheme, slide size and orientation for the entire presentation, change the background fill or slide layout for each separate slide, apply transitions between the slides. It's also possible to add explanatory notes to each slide that can be helpful when demonstrating the presentation in the Presenter mode. Themes allow you to quickly change the presentation design, notably the slides background appearance, predefined fonts for titles and texts and the color scheme that is used for the presentation elements. To select a theme for the presentation, click on the necessary predefined theme from the themes gallery on the right side of the top toolbar Home tab. The selected theme will be applied to all the slides if you have not previously selected certain slides to apply the theme to. To change the selected theme for one or more slides, you can right-click the selected slides in the list on the left (or right-click a slide in the editing area), select the Change Theme option from the contextual menu and choose the necessary theme. Color Schemes affect the predefined colors used for the presentation elements (fonts, lines, fills etc.) and allow you to maintain color consistency throughout the entire presentation. To change a color scheme, click the Change color scheme icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary scheme from the drop-down list. The selected scheme will be applied to all the slides. To change a slide size for all the slides in the presentation, click the Select slide size icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the drop-down list. You can select: one of the two quick-access presets - Standard (4:3) or Widescreen (16:9), the Advanced Settings option that opens the Slide Size Settings window where you can select one of the available presets or set a Custom size specifying the desired Width and Height values. The available presets are: Standard (4:3), Widescreen (16:9), Widescreen (16:10), Letter Paper (8.5x11 in), Ledger Paper (11x17 in), A3 Paper (297x420 mm), A4 Paper (210x297 mm), B4 (ICO) Paper (250x353 mm), B5 (ICO) Paper (176x250 mm), 35 mm Slides, Overhead, Banner. The Slide Orientation menu allows to change the currently selected orientation type. The default orientation type is Landscape that can be switched to Portrait. To change a background fill: in the slide list on the left, select the slides you want to apply the fill to. Or click at any blank space within the currently edited slide in the slide editing area to change the fill type for this separate slide. at the Slide settings tab of the right sidebar, select the necessary option: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color you want to apply to the selected slides. Gradient Fill - select this option to fill the slide with two colors which smoothly change from one to another. Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the slide background. Pattern - select this option to fill the slide with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. For more detailed information on these options please refer to the Fill objects and select colors section. Transitions help make your presentation more dynamic and keep your audience's attention. To apply a transition: in the slide list on the left, select the slides you want to apply a transition to, choose a transition in the Effect drop-down list on the Slide settings tab, Note: to open the Slide settings tab you can click the Slide settings icon on the right or right-click the slide in the slide editing area and select the Slide Settings option from the contextual menu. adjust the transition properties: choose a transition variation, duration and the way to advance slides, click the Apply to All Slides button if you want to apply the same transition to all slides in the presentation. For more detailed information on these options please refer to the Apply transitions section. To change a slide layout: in the slide list on the left, select the slides you want to apply a new layout to, click the Change slide layout icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the necessary layout from the menu. Alternatively, you can right-click the necessary slide in the list on the left or in the editing area, select the Change Layout option from the contextual menu and choose the necessary layout. Note: currently, the following layouts are available: Title Slide, Title and Content, Section Header, Two Content, Comparison, Title Only, Blank, Content with Caption, Picture with Caption, Title and Vertical Text, Vertical Title and Text. To add notes to a slide: in the slide list on the left, select the slide you want to add a note to, click the Click to add notes caption below the slide editing area, type in the text of your note. Note: you can format the text using the icons at the Home tab of the top toolbar. When you start the slideshow in the Presenter mode, you will be able to see all the slide notes below the slide preview area."
     },
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/ViewPresentationInfo.htm", 
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/column.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/column.htm
index ff6bb06a3..889cbbbc0 100644
--- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/column.htm
+++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/column.htm
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
 			<p>The <b>COLUMN</b> function syntax is:</p> 
 			<p style="text-indent: 150px;"><b><em>COLUMN([reference])</em></b></p> 
 			<p>where <b><em>reference</em></b> is a reference to a cell.</p>
-			<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: <b><em>reference</em></b> is an optional argument. If it is omitted, the function will return the column number of a cell selected to display the <b>Column</b> function result. </p>
+			<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: <b><em>reference</em></b> is an optional argument. If it is omitted, the function will return the column number of a cell selected to display the <b>COLUMN</b> function result. </p>
 			<p>To apply the <b>COLUMN</b> function,</p>
 			<ol>
 			<li>select the cell where you wish to display the result,</li>
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/exact.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/exact.htm
index 7a75e74f4..5dcf17874 100644
--- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/exact.htm
+++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/exact.htm
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@
 			</ol>
 			<p>The result will be displayed in the selected cell.</p>
 			<p><em>For example:</em></p>
-			<p>There are two arguments: <em>text1</em> = <b>A1</b>; <em>text2</em> = <b>B1</b>, where <b>A1</b> is <b>MyPassword</b>, <b>B1</b> is <b>mypassword</b>. So the function returns FALSE.</p>
+			<p>There are two arguments: <em>text1</em> = <b>A1</b>; <em>text2</em> = <b>B1</b>, where <b>A1</b> is <b>MyPassword</b>, <b>B1</b> is <b>mypassword</b>. So the function returns <b>FALSE</b>.</p>
 			<p style="text-indent: 150px;"><img alt="EXACT Function: FALSE" src="../images/exactfalse.png" /></p>
 			<p>If we change the <b>A1</b> data converting all the uppercase letters to lowercase, the function returns <b>TRUE</b>:</p>
 			<p style="text-indent: 150px;"><img alt="EXACT Function: TRUE" src="../images/exacttrue.png" /></p>
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/iserror.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/iserror.htm
index f062805ad..dbcbeb001 100644
--- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/iserror.htm
+++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/iserror.htm
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
                 <input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
             </div>
 			<h1>ISERROR Function</h1>
-			<p>The <b>ISERROR</b> function is one of the information functions. It is used to check for an error value. If the cell contains one of the error values: #N/A, #VALUE!, #REF!, #DIV/0!, #NUM!, #NAME? or #NULL, the function returns TRUE, otherwise the function returns FALSE.</p>
+			<p>The <b>ISERROR</b> function is one of the information functions. It is used to check for an error value. If the cell contains one of the error values: #N/A, #VALUE!, #REF!, #DIV/0!, #NUM!, #NAME? or #NULL!, the function returns TRUE, otherwise the function returns FALSE.</p>
 			<p>The <b>ISERROR</b> function syntax is:</p> 
 			<p style="text-indent: 150px;"><b><em>ISERROR(value)</em></b></p> 
 			<p>where <b><em>value</em></b> is a value to test entered manually or included into the cell you make reference to.</p>
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/row.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/row.htm
index 11e878ae7..b97efcbff 100644
--- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/row.htm
+++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/row.htm
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
 			<p>The <b>ROW</b> function syntax is:</p> 
 			<p style="text-indent: 150px;"><b><em>ROW([reference])</em></b></p> 
 			<p>where <b><em>reference</em></b> is a reference to a cell.</p>
-			<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: <b><em>reference</em></b> is an optional argument. If the it is omitted, the function will return the row number of a cell in which the <b>Row</b> function is entered. </p>
+			<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: <b><em>reference</em></b> is an optional argument. If the it is omitted, the function will return the row number of a cell in which the <b>ROW</b> function is entered. </p>
 			<p>To apply the <b>ROW</b> function,</p>
 			<ol>
 			<li>select the cell where you wish to display the result,</li>
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm
index 971896172..08a4e56cf 100644
--- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm
+++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm
@@ -14,14 +14,14 @@
             <input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
         </div>
 		<h1>Advanced Settings of Spreadsheet Editor</h1>
-			<p><b>Spreadsheet Editor</b> lets you change its general advanced settings. To access them, open the <b>File</b> tab at the top toolbar and select the <b>Advanced Settings...</b> option. You can also use the <img alt="Advanced settings icon" src="../images/advanced_settings_icon.png" /> icon in the right upper corner at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar.</p>
+			<p><b>Spreadsheet Editor</b> lets you change its general advanced settings. To access them, open the <b>File</b> tab at the top toolbar and select the <b>Advanced Settings...</b> option. You can also click the <b>View settings</b> <img alt="View settings icon" src="../images/viewsettingsicon.png" /> icon on the right side of the editor header and select the <b>Advanced settings</b> option.</p>
 			<p>The general advanced settings are:</p>
 			<ul>
                 <li>
                     <b>Commenting Display</b> is used to turn on/off the live commenting option:
                     <ul>
                         <li><b>Turn on display of the comments</b> - if you disable this feature, the commented cells will be marked on the sheet only if you click the <b>Comments</b> <img alt="Comments icon" src="../images/commentsicon.png" /> icon at the left sidebar.</li>
-                        <li><b>Turn on display of the resolved comments</b> - if you disable this feature, the resolved comments will be hidden on the sheet. You'll be able to view such comments only if you click the <b>Comments</b> <img alt="Comments icon" src="../images/commentsicon.png" /> icon at the left sidebar.</li>
+                        <li><b>Turn on display of the resolved comments</b> - this feature is disabled by default so that the resolved comments were hidden on the sheet. You can view such comments only if you click the <b>Comments</b> <img alt="Comments icon" src="../images/commentsicon.png" /> icon at the left sidebar. Enable this option if you want to display resolved comments on the sheet.</li>
                     </ul>
                 </li>
                 <li class="onlineDocumentFeatures"><b>Autosave</b> is used to turn on/off automatic saving of changes you make while editing.</li>
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm
index cb223efb8..9efa5156e 100644
--- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm
+++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm
@@ -24,14 +24,14 @@
 					<td class="description">Open the <b>File</b> panel to save, download, print the current spreadsheet, view its info, create a new spreadsheet or open an existing one, access Spreadsheet Editor help or advanced settings.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
-					<td>Open 'Find and Replace' window</td>
+					<td>Open 'Find and Replace' dialog box</td>
 					<td>Ctrl+F</td>
-					<td>Open the <b>Find and Replace</b> window to start searching for a cell containing the characters you need.</td>
+					<td>Open the <b>Find and Replace</b> dialog box to start searching for a cell containing the characters you need.</td>
 				</tr>
                 <tr>
-                    <td>Open 'Find and Replace' window with replacement field</td>
+                    <td>Open 'Find and Replace' dialog box with replacement field</td>
                     <td>Ctrl+H</td>
-                    <td>Open the <b>Find and Replace</b> window with the replacement field to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters.</td>
+                    <td>Open the <b>Find and Replace</b> dialog box with the replacement field to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters.</td>
                 </tr>
                 <tr>
                     <td>Open 'Comments' panel</td>
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@
                 <tr>
 					<td>Save spreadsheet</td>
 					<td>Ctrl+S</td>
-					<td>Save all the changes to the spreadsheet currently edited with Spreadsheet Editor.</td>
+					<td>Save all the changes to the spreadsheet currently edited with Spreadsheet Editor. The active file will be saved with its current file name, location, and file format.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Print spreadsheet</td>
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@
 				<tr class="onlineDocumentFeatures">
 					<td>Download as...</td>
 					<td>Ctrl+Shift+S</td>
-					<td>Open the <b>Download as...</b> pane to save the currently viewed spreadsheet to the computer hard disk drive in one of the supported formats: XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV.</td>
+					<td>Open the <b>Download as...</b> panel to save the currently edited spreadsheet to the computer hard disk drive in one of the supported formats: XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Full screen</td>
@@ -73,79 +73,110 @@
                     <td>F1</td>
                     <td>Open Spreadsheet Editor <b>Help</b> menu.</td>
                 </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Open existing file</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+O</td>
+                    <td>On the <b>Open local file</b> tab in desktop editors, opens the standard dialog box that allows to select an existing file.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Element contextual menu</td>
+                    <td>Shift+F10</td>
+                    <td>Open the selected element <b>contextual menu</b>.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Close file</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+W</td>
+                    <td>Close the selected workbook window.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Close the window (tab)</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+F4</td>
+                    <td>Close the tab in a browser.</td>
+                </tr>
+                
 				<tr>
 					<th colspan="3">Navigation</th>
 				</tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Move one cell up, down, left, or right</td>
+                    <td>Arrow keys</td>
+                    <td>Outline a cell above/below the currently selected one or to the left/to the right of it.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Jump to the edge of the current data region</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+Arrow keys</td>
+                    <td>Outline a cell at the edge of the current data region in a worksheet.</td>
+                </tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Jump to the beginning of the row</td>
 					<td>Home</td>
-					<td>Outline the A column of the current row.</td>
+					<td>Outline a cell in the column A of the current row.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Jump to the beginning of the spreadsheet</td>
 					<td>Ctrl+Home</td>
-					<td>Outline the A1 cell.</td>
+					<td>Outline the cell A1.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Jump to the end of the row</td>
-					<td>End, or Ctrl+Right</td>
+					<td>End, or Ctrl+Right arrow</td>
 					<td>Outline the last cell of the current row.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Jump to the end of the spreadsheet</td>
 					<td>Ctrl+End</td>
-					<td>Outline the last cell of the spreadsheet situated at the bottommost row with data of the rightmost column with data. If the cursor is at the formula line, it will be placed to the end of the text.</td>
+					<td>Outline the lower right used cell on the worksheet situated at the bottommost row with data of the rightmost column with data. If the cursor is in the formula bar, it will be placed to the end of the text.</td>
 				</tr>
-				<!--<tr>
-					<td>Scroll down</td>
-					<td>PgDn</td>
-					<td>Scroll the spreadsheet one screan down.</td>
-				</tr>
-				<tr>
-					<td>Scroll up</td>
-					<td>PgUp</td>
-					<td>Scroll the spreadsheet one screan up.</td>
-				</tr>-->
 				<tr>
 					<td>Move to the previous sheet</td>
-					<td>Alt+PgUp</td>
+					<td>Alt+Page Up</td>
 					<td>Move to the previous sheet in your spreadsheet.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Move to the next sheet</td>
-					<td>Alt+PgDn</td>
+					<td>Alt+Page Down</td>
 					<td>Move to the next sheet in your spreadsheet.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Move up one row</td>
-					<td>Up Arrow</td>
+					<td>Up arrow, or Shift+Enter</td>
 					<td>Outline the cell above the current one in the same column.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Move down one row</td>
-					<td>Down Arrow</td>
+					<td>Down arrow, or Enter</td>
 					<td>Outline the cell below the current one in the same column.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Move left one column</td>
-					<td>Left Arrow, or <br />Tab</td>
+					<td>Left arrow, or <br />Shift+Tab</td>
 					<td>Outline the previous cell of the current row.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Move right one column</td>
-					<td>Right Arrow, or <br />Tab+Shift</td>
+					<td>Right arrow, or <br />Tab</td>
 					<td>Outline the next cell of the current row.</td>
 				</tr>
-				<!--<tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Move down one screen</td>
+                    <td>Page Down</td>
+                    <td>Move one screen down in the worksheet.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Move up one screen</td>
+                    <td>Page Up</td>
+                    <td>Move one screen up in the worksheet.</td>
+                </tr>
+				<tr>
 					<td>Zoom In</td>
-					<td>Ctrl++</td>
-					<td>Zoom in the currently viewed spreadsheet.</td>
+					<td>Ctrl+Plus sign (+)</td>
+					<td>Zoom in the currently edited spreadsheet.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Zoom Out</td>
-					<td>Ctrl+-</td>
-					<td>Zoom out the currently viewed spreadsheet.</td>
-				</tr>-->
+					<td>Ctrl+Minus sign (-)</td>
+					<td>Zoom out the currently edited spreadsheet.</td>
+				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					
 					<th colspan="3">Data Selection</th>
@@ -188,7 +219,22 @@
                 <tr>
                     <td>Extend the selection to the last used cell</td>
                     <td>Ctrl+Shift+End</td>
-                    <td>Select a fragment from the current selected cells to the last used cell on the worksheet.</td>
+                    <td>Select a fragment from the current selected cells to the last used cell on the worksheet (at the bottommost row with data of the rightmost column with data). If the cursor is in the formula bar, this will select all text in the formula bar from the cursor position to the end without affecting the height of the formula bar.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Select one cell to the left</td>
+                    <td>Shift+Tab</td>
+                    <td>Select one cell to the left in a table.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Select one cell to the right</td>
+                    <td>Tab</td>
+                    <td>Select one cell to the right in a table.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Extend the selection to the last nonblank cell</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+Shift+Arrow key</td>
+                    <td>Extend the selection to the last nonblank cell in the same column or row as the active cell. If the next cell is blank, the selection will be extended to the next nonblank cell.</td>
                 </tr>
 				<tr>
 				<th colspan="3">Undo and Redo</th>
@@ -249,6 +295,11 @@
 					<td>Ctrl+K</td>
 					<td>Insert a hyperlink to an external website or another worksheet.</td>
 				</tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Edit active cell</td>
+                    <td>F2<br />CONTROL+U (for Mac)</td>
+                    <td>Edit the active cell and position the insertion point at the end of the cell contents. If editing in a cell is turned off, the insertion point will be moved into the Formula Bar.</td>
+                </tr>
                 <tr>
                     <th colspan="3">Data Filtering</th>
                 </tr>
@@ -287,35 +338,119 @@
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Delete to the left</td>
-					<td>BACKSPACE</td>
-					<td>Delete one character to the left in the formula bar or in the selected cell when the cell editing mode is activated.</td>
+					<td>Backspace</td>
+					<td>Delete one character to the left in the formula bar or in the selected cell when the cell editing mode is activated. Also removes the content of the active cell.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Delete to the right</td>
 					<td>Delete</td>
-					<td>Delete one character to the right in the formula bar or in the selected cell when the cell editing mode is activated.</td>
+					<td>Delete one character to the right in the formula bar or in the selected cell when the cell editing mode is activated. Also removes the cell contents (data and formulas) from selected cells without affecting cell formats or comments.</td>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>Clear cell content</td>
 					<td>Delete</td>
 					<td>Remove the content (data and formulas) from selected cells without affecting cell format or comments.</td>
 				</tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Complete a cell entry and move to the right</td>
+                    <td>Tab</td>
+                    <td>Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the formula bar and move to the cell on the right.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Complete a cell entry and move to the left</td>
+                    <td>Shift+Tab</td>
+                    <td>Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the formula bar and move to the cell on the left <!--or the previous option in a dialog box-->.</td>
+                </tr>
 				<tr>
 				<th colspan="3">Functions</th>
 				</tr>
 				<tr>
 					<td>SUM function</td>
-					<td>Alt+equals (=)</td>
+					<td>Alt+Equal sign (=)</td>
 					<td>Insert the <b>SUM</b> function into the selected cell.</td>
 				</tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Open drop-down list</td>
+                    <td><!--Down arrow or--> Alt+Down arrow</td>
+                    <td>Open a selected drop-down list.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Open contextual menu</td>
+                    <td>Context menu key</td>
+                    <td>Open a contextual menu for the selected cell or cell range.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <th colspan="3"><a id="dataformats"></a>Data Formats</th>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Open the 'Number Format' dialog box</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+1</td>
+                    <td>Open the <b>Number Format</b> dialog box.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Apply the General format</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+Shift+~</td>
+                    <td>Applies the <b>General</b> number format.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Apply the Currency format</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+Shift+$</td>
+                    <td>Applies the <b>Currency</b> format with two decimal places (negative numbers in parentheses).</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Apply the Percentage format</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+Shift+%</td>
+                    <td>Applies the <b>Percentage</b> format with no decimal places.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Apply the Exponential format</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+Shift+^</td>
+                    <td>Applies the <b>Exponential</b> number format with two decimal places.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Apply the Date format</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+Shift+#</td>
+                    <td>Applies the <b>Date</b> format with the day, month, and year.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Apply the Time format</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+Shift+@</td>
+                    <td>Applies the <b>Time</b> format with the hour and minute, and AM or PM.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Apply the Number format</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+Shift+!</td>
+                    <td>Applies the <b>Number</b> format with two decimal places, thousands separator, and minus sign (-) for negative values.</td>
+                </tr>
 				<tr>
-				<th colspan="3">Modifying Objects</th>
-				</tr>
-				<tr>
-					<td>Movement by one-pixel increments</td>
-					<td>Ctrl</td>
-					<td>Hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by one pixel at a time.</td>
-				</tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <th colspan="3"><a id="workwithobjects"></a>Modifying Objects</th>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Constrain movement</td>
+                    <td>Shift+drag</td>
+                    <td>Constrain the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Set 15-degree rotation</td>
+                    <td>Shift+drag (when rotating)</td>
+                    <td>Constrain the rotation angle to 15-degree increments.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Maintain proportions</td>
+                    <td>Shift+drag (when resizing)</td>
+                    <td>Maintain the proportions of the selected object when resizing.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Draw straight line or arrow</td>
+                    <td>Shift+drag (when drawing lines/arrows)</td>
+                    <td>Draw a straight vertical/horizontal/45-degree line or arrow.</td>
+                </tr>
+                <tr>
+                    <td>Movement by one-pixel increments</td>
+                    <td>Ctrl+Arrow keys</td>
+                    <td>Hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by one pixel at a time.</td>
+                </tr>
 			</table>
 		</div>
 	</body>
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm
index b059a0269..4294d9a68 100644
--- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm
+++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm
@@ -16,12 +16,12 @@
 		<h1>View Settings and Navigation Tools</h1>
 			<p>To help you view and select cells in a large spreadsheet <b>Spreadsheet Editor</b> offers several tools: adjustable bars, scrollbars, sheet navigation buttons, sheet tabs and zoom.</p>
 			<h3>Adjust the View Settings</h3>
-			<p>To adjust default view settings and set the most convenient mode to work with the spreadsheet, switch to the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar, click the <b>View settings</b> <img alt="View settings icon" src="../images/viewsettingsicon.png" /> icon of the top toolbar and select which interface elements you want to be hidden or shown.
+			<p>To adjust default view settings and set the most convenient mode to work with the spreadsheet, click the <b>View settings</b> <img alt="View settings icon" src="../images/viewsettingsicon.png" /> icon on the right side of the editor header and select which interface elements you want to be hidden or shown.
 			You can select the following options from the <b>View settings</b> drop-down list:
 			</p>
 			<ul>
                 <li>
-                    <b>Hide Toolbar</b> -  hides the top toolbar that contains commands while tabs remain visible. When this option is enabled, you can click any tab to display the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed until you click anywhere outside it. To disable this mode switch to the <b>Home</b> tab, then click the <b>View settings</b> <img alt="View settings icon" src="../images/viewsettingsicon.png" /> icon and click the <b>Hide Toolbar</b> option once again. The top toolbar will be displayed all the time.
+                    <b>Hide Toolbar</b> -  hides the top toolbar that contains commands while tabs remain visible. When this option is enabled, you can click any tab to display the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed until you click anywhere outside it. To disable this mode, click the <b>View settings</b> <img alt="View settings icon" src="../images/viewsettingsicon.png" /> icon and click the <b>Hide Toolbar</b> option once again. The top toolbar will be displayed all the time.
                     <p class="note"><b>Note</b>: alternatively, you can just double-click any tab to hide the top toolbar or display it again.</p>
                 </li>
 			<li><b>Hide Formula Bar</b> - hides the bar situated below the top toolbar and used to enter and review the formula and its content. To show the hidden <b>Formula Bar</b> click this option once again.</li>
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm
index 965ab3ede..5462df1a1 100644
--- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm
+++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
             <input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
         </div>
 		<h1>Search and Replace Functions</h1>
-			<p>To search for the needed characters, words or phrases used in the current spreadsheet, click the <img alt="Search icon" src="../images/searchicon.png" /> icon situated at the left sidebar.</p>
+			<p>To search for the needed characters, words or phrases used in the current spreadsheet, click the <img alt="Search icon" src="../images/searchicon.png" /> icon situated at the left sidebar or use the <em>Ctrl+F</em> key combination.</p>
             <p>If you want to search for/replace values within a certain area on the current sheet only, select the necessary cell range and then click the <img alt="Search icon" src="../images/searchicon.png" /> icon.</p>
 			<p>The <b>Find and Replace</b> window will open:</p>
 			<img alt="Find and Replace Window" src="../images/search_window.png" />
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
 			The search will be performed either towards the beginning of the worksheet (if you click the <img alt="Search Up button" src="../images/searchupbutton.png" /> button) or towards the end of the worksheet (if you click the <img alt="Search Down button" src="../images/searchdownbutton.png" /> button) from the current position.</li>
 			</ol>
 			<p>The first occurrence of the required characters in the selected direction will be highlighted. If it is not the word you are looking for, click the selected button again to find the next occurrence of the characters you entered.</p> 
-			<p><b>To replace</b> one or more occurrences of the found characters click the <b>Replace</b> link below the data entry field. The <b>Find and Replace</b> window will change:</p>
+			<p><b>To replace</b> one or more occurrences of the found characters click the <b>Replace</b> link below the data entry field or use the <em>Ctrl+H</em> key combination. The <b>Find and Replace</b> window will change:</p>
             <img alt="Find and Replace Window" src="../images/search_replace_window.png" />
 			<ol>
 			<li>Type in the replacement text into the bottom data entry field.</li>
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm
index 964998cc1..074710240 100644
--- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm
+++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
             <input id="search" class="searchBar" placeholder="Search" type="text" onkeypress="doSearch(event)">
         </div>
 			<h1>Home tab</h1>
-            <p>The <b>Home</b> tab opens by default when you open a spreadsheet. It allows to format cells and data within them, apply filters, insert functions. Some other options are also available here, such as color schemes, <b>Format as table template</b> feature, view settings and so on.</p>
+            <p>The <b>Home</b> tab opens by default when you open a spreadsheet. It allows to format cells and data within them, apply filters, insert functions. Some other options are also available here, such as color schemes, <b>Format as table template</b> feature and so on.</p>
             <p><img alt="Home tab" src="../images/interface/hometab.png" /></p>
             <p>Using this tab, you can:</p>
             <ul>
@@ -26,8 +26,7 @@
                 <li>change <a href="../UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">number format</a>,</li>
                 <li>add or remove <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertDeleteCells.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">cells, rows, columns</a>,</li>
                 <li><a href="../UsageInstructions/ClearFormatting.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">copy/clear</a> cell formatting,</li>
-                <li><a href="../UsageInstructions/SortData.htm#tabletemplate" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">apply a table template</a> to a selected cell range,</li>
-                <li>adjust <a href="../HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">View Settings</a> and access the editor <a href="../HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Advanced Settings</a>.</li>
+                <li><a href="../UsageInstructions/SortData.htm#tabletemplate" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">apply a table template</a> to a selected cell range.</li>
             </ul>
 		</div>
 	</body>
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm
index dcc45f4ed..ee0f267b5 100644
--- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm
+++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
             <p><img alt="Editor window" src="../images/interface/editorwindow.png" /></p>
             <p>The editor interface consists of the following main elements:</p>
             <ol>
-                <li><b>Editor header</b> displays the logo, menu tabs, spreadsheet name as well as two icons on the right that allow to <a href="../HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">set access rights</a> and return to the Documents list.
+                <li><b>Editor header</b> displays the logo, menu tabs, spreadsheet name as well as three icons on the right that allow to <a href="../HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">set access rights</a>, return to the Documents list, adjust <a href="../HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">View Settings</a> and access the editor <a href="../HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Advanced Settings</a>.
                 <p><img alt="Icons in the editor header" src="../images/interface/rightpart.png" /></p>
                 </li>
                 <li><b>Top toolbar</b> displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: <a href="../ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">File</a>, <a href="../ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Home</a>, <a href="../ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Insert</a>, <a href="../ProgramInterface/PivotTableTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Pivot Table</a>, <a href="../ProgramInterface/CollaborationTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Collaboration</a>, <a href="../ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">Plugins</a>.
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm
index 1d2b2e253..f53e39db5 100644
--- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm
+++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm
@@ -18,22 +18,24 @@
 			<ol>
 				<li>select a cell where a hyperlink will be added,</li>
                 <li>switch to the <b>Insert</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
-				<li>click the <img alt="Hyperlink icon" src="../images/addhyperlink.png" /> <b>Hyperlink</b> icon at the top toolbar or select the same option from the right-click menu,</li>
+				<li>click the <img alt="Hyperlink icon" src="../images/addhyperlink.png" /> <b>Hyperlink</b> icon at the top toolbar,</li>
 				<li>after that the <b>Hyperlink Settings</b> will appear where you can specify the hyperlink settings:
 				<ul>
-					<li><b>Link Type</b> - select a link type you wish to insert from the drop-down list:
-					<p>Use the <b>External Link</b> option and enter a URL in the format <i>http://www.example.com</i> in the <b>Link to</b> field below if you need to add a hyperlink leading to an external website.</p>
+					<li>Select a link type you wish to insert:
+					<p>Use the <b>External Link</b> option and enter a URL in the format <em>http://www.example.com</em> in the <b>Link to</b> field below if you need to add a hyperlink leading to an external website.</p>
+                        <p><img alt="Hyperlink Settings window" src="../images/hyperlinkwindow.png" /></p>
 					<p>Use the <b>Internal Data Range</b> option and select a worksheet and a cell range in the fields below if you need to add a hyperlink leading to a certain cell range in the same spreadsheet.</p>
+                        <p><img alt="Hyperlink Settings window" src="../images/internallink.png" /></p>
 					</li>
 					<li><b>Display</b> - enter a text that will become clickable and lead to the web address specified in the upper field.
 					<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: if the selected cell already contains data, it will be automatically displayed in this field.</p>
 					</li>
 					<li><b>ScreenTip Text</b> - enter a text that will become visible in a small pop-up window that provides a brief note or label pertaining to the hyperlink being pointed to.</li>
-				</ul>
-				<p><img alt="Hyperlink Settings window" src="../images/hyperlinkwindow.png" /></p>
+				</ul>				
 				</li>
 				<li>click the <b>OK</b> button.</li>
 			</ol>
+            <p>To add a hyperlink, you can also use the <b>Ctrl+K</b> key combination or click with the right mouse button at a position where a hyperlink will be added and select the <b>Hyperlink</b> option in the right-click menu.</p>
 			<p>When you hover the cursor over the added hyperlink, the ScreenTip will appear containing the text you specified. To follow the link press the <b>CTRL</b> key and click the link in your spreadsheet.</p>
 			<p>To delete the added hyperlink, activate the cell containing the added hyperlink and press the <b>Delete</b> key, or right-click the cell and select the <b>Clear All</b> option from the drop-down list.</p>
 		</div>
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm
index 9e0bed2c0..42ddb617e 100644
--- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm
+++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
 				<li>select a cell, a range of cells with the mouse or the whole worksheet by pressing the <b>Ctrl+A</b> key combination,
                 <p class="note"><b>Note</b>: you can also select multiple non-adjacent cells or cell ranges holding down the <b>Ctrl</b> key while selecting cells/ranges with the mouse.</p>
                 </li>
-				<li>drop-down the <b>Number format</b> <img alt="General format button" src="../images/generalformat.png" /> list situated at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar and select the number format you wish to apply:
+				<li>drop-down the <b>Number format</b> <img alt="General format button" src="../images/generalformat.png" /> list situated at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar or right-click the selected cells and use the <b>Number Format</b> option from the contextual menu. Select the number format you wish to apply:
 					<ul>
 						<li><b>General</b> - is used to display the data you enter as plain numbers in the most compact way without any additional signs,</li>
 						<li><b>Number</b> - is used to display the numbers with 0-30 digits after the decimal point where a thousand separator is added between each group of three digits before the decimal point,</li>
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
                         <li><b>Currency</b> - is used to display monetary values with the default currency symbol and two decimal places. To apply another currency symbol or number of decimal places, follow the <a href="../UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm#customize" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">instructions below</a>. Unlike the <b>Accounting</b> format, the <b>Currency</b> format places a currency symbol directly before the first digit and displays negative values with the negative sign (-).</li>
 						<li><b>Date</b> - is used to display dates<!--. You can select one of the following date formats: <em>MM-dd-yy</em>, <em>MM-dd-yyyy</em>, <em>dd-MM-yy</em>, <em>dd-MM-yyyy</em>, <em>dd-MMM-yyyy</em>, <em>dd-MMM</em>, <em>MMM-yy</em>-->,</li>
 						<li><b>Time</b> - is used to display time<!--. You can select one of the following time formats: <em>HH:mm</em>, <em>HH:MM:ss</em>, <em>hh:mm tt</em>, <em>hh:mm:ss tt</em>, <em>[h]:mm:ss</em>-->,</li>
-						<li><b>Persentage</b> - is used to display the data as a percentage accompanied by a percent sign <b>%</b>,
+						<li><b>Percentage</b> - is used to display the data as a percentage accompanied by a percent sign <b>%</b>,
 							<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: to quickly apply the percent style to your data you can also use the <b>Percent style</b> <img alt="Percent style icon" src="../images/percentstyle.png" /> icon at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar.</p>
 						</li>
                         <li><b>Fraction</b> - is used to display the numbers as common fractions rather than decimals.</li>
@@ -48,11 +48,14 @@
 				    </ul>
 				 </li>
 			</ol>
+            <p class="note">
+                <b>Note</b>: to change a number format you can also use <a href="../HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm#dataformats" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)">keyboard shortcuts</a>.
+            </p>
             <h3 id="customize">Customize the number format</h3>
             <p>You can customize the applied number format in the following way:</p>
 			<ol>
                 <li>select the cells you want to customize the number format for,</li>
-                <li>drop-down the <b>Number format</b> <img alt="General format button" src="../images/generalformat.png" /> list at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar,</li>
+                <li>drop-down the <b>Number format</b> <img alt="General format button" src="../images/generalformat.png" /> list at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar or right-click the selected cells and use the <b>Number Format</b> option from the contextual menu,</li>
                 <li>select the <b>More formats</b> option,</li>
                 <li>in the <b>Number Format</b> window that opens, adjust the available parameters. The options differ depending on the number format that is applied to the selected cells. You can use the <b>Category</b> list to change the number format.
                 <p><img alt="Number Format window" src="../images/numberformatwindow.png" /></p>  
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm
index d400001ff..96fe828c6 100644
--- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm
+++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm
@@ -44,7 +44,9 @@
 			<ol>
 				<li>select the image you wish to replace with the mouse,</li>
 				<li>click the <b>Image settings</b> <img alt="Image settings icon" src="../images/image_settings_icon.png" /> icon at the right sidebar,</li>
-				<li>in the <b>Replace Image</b> section click the button you need: <b>From File</b> or <b>From URL</b> and select the desired image.</li>
+				<li>in the <b>Replace Image</b> section click the button you need: <b>From File</b> or <b>From URL</b> and select the desired image.
+                    <p class="note"><b>Note</b>: alternatively, you can right-click the image and use the <b>Replace image</b> option from the contextual menu.</p>
+                </li>
 			</ol>
 			<p>The selected image will be replaced.</p>
             <p>When the image is selected, the <b>Shape settings</b> <img alt="Shape settings icon" src="../images/shape_settings_icon.png" /> icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the <b>Shape settings</b> tab at the right sidebar and adjust the shape <a href="../UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm#shape_stroke" onclick="onhyperlinkclick(this)"><b>Stroke</b></a> type, size and color as well as change the shape type selecting another shape from the <b>Change Autoshape</b> menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly.</p>
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/MergeCells.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/MergeCells.htm
index 05eb20b69..b3efd69a1 100644
--- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/MergeCells.htm
+++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/MergeCells.htm
@@ -22,9 +22,9 @@
 			<li>click the <b>Merge</b> <img alt="Merge icon" src="../images/merge.png" /> icon situated at the <b>Home</b> tab of the top toolbar and select one of the available options:
 			<p class="note"><b>Note</b>: only the data in the upper-left cell of the selected range will remain in the merged cell. Data in other cells of the selected range will be deleted.</p>
 			<ul>
-			<li>if you select the <b>Merge &amp; Center</b> option the cells of the selected range will be merged and the data will be centered in the merged cells;</li>
-			<li>if you select the <b>Merge Across</b> option the cells of each row of the selected range will be merged and the data will be aligned to the left side of the merged cells;</li>
-			<li>if you select the <b>Merge Cells</b> option the cells of the selected range will be merged and the data will be aligned by the bottom vertically and by the left side horizontally.</li>
+			<li>if you select the <b>Merge &amp; Center</b> option the cells of the selected range will be merged and the data in the merged cell will be centered;</li>
+			<li>if you select the <b>Merge Across</b> option the cells of each row of the selected range will be merged and the data in the merged cells will be aligned by the left side (for text) or by the right side (for numeric values);</li>
+			<li>if you select the <b>Merge Cells</b> option the cells of the selected range will be merged and the data will be aligned by the left side (for text) or by the right side (for numeric values).</li>
 			</ul>
 			</li>
 			</ol>
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/bulletsandnumbering.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/bulletsandnumbering.png
index 0725012d8..680d2ee10 100644
Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/bulletsandnumbering.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/bulletsandnumbering.png differ
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/hyperlinkwindow.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/hyperlinkwindow.png
index a40ae5ea9..36dbec0e9 100644
Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/hyperlinkwindow.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/hyperlinkwindow.png differ
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png
index ceb859dcb..2c65cf6b6 100644
Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png differ
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png
index ae8bbed3a..04ccb13c9 100644
Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png differ
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png
index 53c0fb011..ee66beb60 100644
Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png differ
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png
index 2b35d306c..37a5aa592 100644
Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png differ
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png
index 625510d43..2b6479ade 100644
Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png differ
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pivottabletab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pivottabletab.png
index 4d5f96450..fb7606b7c 100644
Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pivottabletab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pivottabletab.png differ
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png
index 81948bded..0850187e7 100644
Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png differ
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/rightpart.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/rightpart.png
index 3f42acf75..1adaa81ce 100644
Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/rightpart.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/rightpart.png differ
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/internallink.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/internallink.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8414d040a
Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/internallink.png differ
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/viewsettingsicon.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/viewsettingsicon.png
index ff2feb799..9fa0d1fba 100644
Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/viewsettingsicon.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/viewsettingsicon.png differ
diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js
index 355dfb006..a968fe28c 100644
--- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js
+++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js
@@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "Functions/column.htm", 
         "title": "COLUMN Function", 
-        "body": "The COLUMN function is one of the lookup and reference functions. It is used to return the column number of a cell. The COLUMN function syntax is: COLUMN([reference]) where reference is a reference to a cell. Note: reference is an optional argument. If it is omitted, the function will return the column number of a cell selected to display the Column function result. To apply the COLUMN function, select the cell where you wish to display the result, click the Insert function icon situated at the top toolbar, or right-click within a selected cell and select the Insert Function option from the menu, or click the icon situated at the formula bar, select the Lookup and Reference function group from the list, click the COLUMN function, enter the required argument, press the Enter button. The result will be displayed in the selected cell."
+        "body": "The COLUMN function is one of the lookup and reference functions. It is used to return the column number of a cell. The COLUMN function syntax is: COLUMN([reference]) where reference is a reference to a cell. Note: reference is an optional argument. If it is omitted, the function will return the column number of a cell selected to display the COLUMN function result. To apply the COLUMN function, select the cell where you wish to display the result, click the Insert function icon situated at the top toolbar, or right-click within a selected cell and select the Insert Function option from the menu, or click the icon situated at the formula bar, select the Lookup and Reference function group from the list, click the COLUMN function, enter the required argument, press the Enter button. The result will be displayed in the selected cell."
     },
    {
         "id": "Functions/columns.htm", 
@@ -1123,7 +1123,7 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "Functions/iserror.htm", 
         "title": "ISERROR Function", 
-        "body": "The ISERROR function is one of the information functions. It is used to check for an error value. If the cell contains one of the error values: #N/A, #VALUE!, #REF!, #DIV/0!, #NUM!, #NAME? or #NULL, the function returns TRUE, otherwise the function returns FALSE. The ISERROR function syntax is: ISERROR(value) where value is a value to test entered manually or included into the cell you make reference to. To apply the ISERROR function, select the cell where you wish to display the result, click the Insert function icon situated at the top toolbar, or right-click within a selected cell and select the Insert Function option from the menu, or click the icon situated at the formula bar, select the Information function group from the list, click the ISERROR function, enter the required argument, press the Enter button. The result will be displayed in the selected cell."
+        "body": "The ISERROR function is one of the information functions. It is used to check for an error value. If the cell contains one of the error values: #N/A, #VALUE!, #REF!, #DIV/0!, #NUM!, #NAME? or #NULL!, the function returns TRUE, otherwise the function returns FALSE. The ISERROR function syntax is: ISERROR(value) where value is a value to test entered manually or included into the cell you make reference to. To apply the ISERROR function, select the cell where you wish to display the result, click the Insert function icon situated at the top toolbar, or right-click within a selected cell and select the Insert Function option from the menu, or click the icon situated at the formula bar, select the Information function group from the list, click the ISERROR function, enter the required argument, press the Enter button. The result will be displayed in the selected cell."
     },
    {
         "id": "Functions/iseven.htm", 
@@ -1733,7 +1733,7 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "Functions/row.htm", 
         "title": "ROW Function", 
-        "body": "The ROW function is one of the lookup and reference functions. It is used to return the row number of a cell reference. The ROW function syntax is: ROW([reference]) where reference is a reference to a cell. Note: reference is an optional argument. If the it is omitted, the function will return the row number of a cell in which the Row function is entered. To apply the ROW function, select the cell where you wish to display the result, click the Insert function icon situated at the top toolbar, or right-click within a selected cell and select the Insert Function option from the menu, or click the icon situated at the formula bar, select the Lookup and Reference function group from the list, click the ROW function, enter the required argument, press the Enter button. The result will be displayed in the selected cell."
+        "body": "The ROW function is one of the lookup and reference functions. It is used to return the row number of a cell reference. The ROW function syntax is: ROW([reference]) where reference is a reference to a cell. Note: reference is an optional argument. If the it is omitted, the function will return the row number of a cell in which the ROW function is entered. To apply the ROW function, select the cell where you wish to display the result, click the Insert function icon situated at the top toolbar, or right-click within a selected cell and select the Insert Function option from the menu, or click the icon situated at the formula bar, select the Lookup and Reference function group from the list, click the ROW function, enter the required argument, press the Enter button. The result will be displayed in the selected cell."
     },
    {
         "id": "Functions/rows.htm", 
@@ -2213,7 +2213,7 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm", 
         "title": "Advanced Settings of Spreadsheet Editor", 
-        "body": "Spreadsheet Editor lets you change its general advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab at the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings... option. You can also use the icon in the right upper corner at the Home tab of the top toolbar. The general advanced settings are: Commenting Display is used to turn on/off the live commenting option: Turn on display of the comments - if you disable this feature, the commented cells will be marked on the sheet only if you click the Comments icon at the left sidebar. Turn on display of the resolved comments - if you disable this feature, the resolved comments will be hidden on the sheet. You'll be able to view such comments only if you click the Comments icon at the left sidebar. Autosave is used to turn on/off automatic saving of changes you make while editing. Co-editing Mode is used to select the display of the changes made during the co-editing: By default the Fast mode is selected, the users who take part in the document co-editing will see the changes in realtime once they are made by other users. If you prefer not to see other user changes (so that they do not disturb you, or for some other reason), select the Strict mode and all the changes will be shown only after you click the Save icon notifying you that there are changes from other users. Default Zoom Value is used to set the default zoom value selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 200%. Font Hinting is used to select the type a font is displayed in Spreadsheet Editor: Choose As Windows if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on Windows, i.e. using Windows font hinting. Choose As OS X if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on a Mac, i.e. without any font hinting at all. Choose Native if you want your text to be displayed with the hinting embedded into font files. Unit of Measurement is used to specify what units are used for measuring elements parameters such as width, height, spacing, margins etc. You can select the Centimeter, Point, or Inch option. Formula Language is used to select the language for displaying and entering formula names. Regional Settings is used to select the default display format for currency and date and time. To save the changes you made, click the Apply button."
+        "body": "Spreadsheet Editor lets you change its general advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab at the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings... option. You can also click the View settings icon on the right side of the editor header and select the Advanced settings option. The general advanced settings are: Commenting Display is used to turn on/off the live commenting option: Turn on display of the comments - if you disable this feature, the commented cells will be marked on the sheet only if you click the Comments icon at the left sidebar. Turn on display of the resolved comments - this feature is disabled by default so that the resolved comments were hidden on the sheet. You can view such comments only if you click the Comments icon at the left sidebar. Enable this option if you want to display resolved comments on the sheet. Autosave is used to turn on/off automatic saving of changes you make while editing. Co-editing Mode is used to select the display of the changes made during the co-editing: By default the Fast mode is selected, the users who take part in the document co-editing will see the changes in realtime once they are made by other users. If you prefer not to see other user changes (so that they do not disturb you, or for some other reason), select the Strict mode and all the changes will be shown only after you click the Save icon notifying you that there are changes from other users. Default Zoom Value is used to set the default zoom value selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 200%. Font Hinting is used to select the type a font is displayed in Spreadsheet Editor: Choose As Windows if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on Windows, i.e. using Windows font hinting. Choose As OS X if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on a Mac, i.e. without any font hinting at all. Choose Native if you want your text to be displayed with the hinting embedded into font files. Unit of Measurement is used to specify what units are used for measuring elements parameters such as width, height, spacing, margins etc. You can select the Centimeter, Point, or Inch option. Formula Language is used to select the language for displaying and entering formula names. Regional Settings is used to select the default display format for currency and date and time. To save the changes you made, click the Apply button."
     },
    {
         "id": "HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm", 
@@ -2223,17 +2223,17 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm", 
         "title": "Keyboard Shortcuts", 
-        "body": "Working with Spreadsheet Open 'File' panel Alt+F Open the File panel to save, download, print the current spreadsheet, view its info, create a new spreadsheet or open an existing one, access Spreadsheet Editor help or advanced settings. Open 'Find and Replace' window Ctrl+F Open the Find and Replace window to start searching for a cell containing the characters you need. Open 'Find and Replace' window with replacement field Ctrl+H Open the Find and Replace window with the replacement field to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters. Open 'Comments' panel Ctrl+Shift+H Open the Comments panel to add your own comment or reply to other users' comments. Open comment field Alt+H Open a data entry field where you can add the text of your comment. Open 'Chat' panel Alt+Q Open the Chat panel and send a message. Save spreadsheet Ctrl+S Save all the changes to the spreadsheet currently edited with Spreadsheet Editor. Print spreadsheet Ctrl+P Print your spreadsheet with one of the available printers or save it to a file. Download as... Ctrl+Shift+S Open the Download as... pane to save the currently viewed spreadsheet to the computer hard disk drive in one of the supported formats: XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV. Full screen F11 Switch to the full screen view to fit Spreadsheet Editor into your screen. Help menu F1 Open Spreadsheet Editor Help menu. Navigation Jump to the beginning of the row Home Outline the A column of the current row. Jump to the beginning of the spreadsheet Ctrl+Home Outline the A1 cell. Jump to the end of the row End, or Ctrl+Right Outline the last cell of the current row. Jump to the end of the spreadsheet Ctrl+End Outline the last cell of the spreadsheet situated at the bottommost row with data of the rightmost column with data. If the cursor is at the formula line, it will be placed to the end of the text. Move to the previous sheet Alt+PgUp Move to the previous sheet in your spreadsheet. Move to the next sheet Alt+PgDn Move to the next sheet in your spreadsheet. Move up one row Up Arrow Outline the cell above the current one in the same column. Move down one row Down Arrow Outline the cell below the current one in the same column. Move left one column Left Arrow, or Tab Outline the previous cell of the current row. Move right one column Right Arrow, or Tab+Shift Outline the next cell of the current row. Data Selection Select all Ctrl+A, or Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar Select the entire worksheet. Select column Ctrl+Spacebar Select an entire column in a worksheet. Select row Shift+Spacebar Select an entire row in a worksheet. Select fragment Shift+Arrow Select the cell by cell. Select from cursor to beginning of row Shift+Home Select a fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the current row. Select from cursor to end of row Shift+End Select a fragment from the cursor to the end of the current row. Extend the selection to beginning of worksheet Ctrl+Shift+Home Select a fragment from the current selected cells to the beginning of the worksheet. Extend the selection to the last used cell Ctrl+Shift+End Select a fragment from the current selected cells to the last used cell on the worksheet. Undo and Redo Undo Ctrl+Z Reverse the latest performed action. Redo Ctrl+Y Repeat the latest undone action. Cut, Copy, and Paste Cut Ctrl+X, Shift+Delete Cut the the selected data and send them to the computer clipboard memory. The cut data can be later inserted to another place in the same worksheet, into another spreadsheet, or into some other program. Copy Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert Send the selected data to the computer clipboard memory. The copied data can be later inserted to another place in the same worksheet, into another spreadsheet, or into some other program. Paste Ctrl+V, Shift+Insert Insert the previously copied/cut data from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The data can be previously copied from the same worksheet, from another spreadsheet, or from some other program. Data Formatting Bold Ctrl+B Make the font of the selected text fragment bold giving it more weight or remove bold formatting. Italic Ctrl+I Make the font of the selected text fragment italicized giving it some right side tilt or remove italic formatting. Underline Ctrl+U Make the selected text fragment underlined with the line going under the letters or remove underlining. Strikeout Ctrl+5 Make the selected text fragment struck out with the line going through the letters or remove strikeout formatting. Add Hyperlink Ctrl+K Insert a hyperlink to an external website or another worksheet. Data Filtering Enable/Remove Filter Ctrl+Shift+L Enable a filter for a selected cell range or remove the filter. Format as table template Ctrl+L Apply a table template to a selected cell range. Data Entry Complete cell entry and move down Enter Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the formula bar, and move to the cell below. Complete cell entry and move up Shift+Enter Complete a cell entry in the selected cell, and move to the cell above. Start new line Alt+Enter Start a new line in the same cell. Cancel Esc Cancel an entry in the selected cell or the formula bar. Delete to the left BACKSPACE Delete one character to the left in the formula bar or in the selected cell when the cell editing mode is activated. Delete to the right Delete Delete one character to the right in the formula bar or in the selected cell when the cell editing mode is activated. Clear cell content Delete Remove the content (data and formulas) from selected cells without affecting cell format or comments. Functions SUM function Alt+equals (=) Insert the SUM function into the selected cell. Modifying Objects Movement by one-pixel increments Ctrl Hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by one pixel at a time."
+        "body": "Working with Spreadsheet Open 'File' panel Alt+F Open the File panel to save, download, print the current spreadsheet, view its info, create a new spreadsheet or open an existing one, access Spreadsheet Editor help or advanced settings. Open 'Find and Replace' dialog box Ctrl+F Open the Find and Replace dialog box to start searching for a cell containing the characters you need. Open 'Find and Replace' dialog box with replacement field Ctrl+H Open the Find and Replace dialog box with the replacement field to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters. Open 'Comments' panel Ctrl+Shift+H Open the Comments panel to add your own comment or reply to other users' comments. Open comment field Alt+H Open a data entry field where you can add the text of your comment. Open 'Chat' panel Alt+Q Open the Chat panel and send a message. Save spreadsheet Ctrl+S Save all the changes to the spreadsheet currently edited with Spreadsheet Editor. The active file will be saved with its current file name, location, and file format. Print spreadsheet Ctrl+P Print your spreadsheet with one of the available printers or save it to a file. Download as... Ctrl+Shift+S Open the Download as... panel to save the currently edited spreadsheet to the computer hard disk drive in one of the supported formats: XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV. Full screen F11 Switch to the full screen view to fit Spreadsheet Editor into your screen. Help menu F1 Open Spreadsheet Editor Help menu. Open existing file Ctrl+O On the Open local file tab in desktop editors, opens the standard dialog box that allows to select an existing file. Element contextual menu Shift+F10 Open the selected element contextual menu. Close file Ctrl+W Close the selected workbook window. Close the window (tab) Ctrl+F4 Close the tab in a browser. Navigation Move one cell up, down, left, or right Arrow keys Outline a cell above/below the currently selected one or to the left/to the right of it. Jump to the edge of the current data region Ctrl+Arrow keys Outline a cell at the edge of the current data region in a worksheet. Jump to the beginning of the row Home Outline a cell in the column A of the current row. Jump to the beginning of the spreadsheet Ctrl+Home Outline the cell A1. Jump to the end of the row End, or Ctrl+Right arrow Outline the last cell of the current row. Jump to the end of the spreadsheet Ctrl+End Outline the lower right used cell on the worksheet situated at the bottommost row with data of the rightmost column with data. If the cursor is in the formula bar, it will be placed to the end of the text. Move to the previous sheet Alt+Page Up Move to the previous sheet in your spreadsheet. Move to the next sheet Alt+Page Down Move to the next sheet in your spreadsheet. Move up one row Up arrow, or Shift+Enter Outline the cell above the current one in the same column. Move down one row Down arrow, or Enter Outline the cell below the current one in the same column. Move left one column Left arrow, or Shift+Tab Outline the previous cell of the current row. Move right one column Right arrow, or Tab Outline the next cell of the current row. Move down one screen Page Down Move one screen down in the worksheet. Move up one screen Page Up Move one screen up in the worksheet. Zoom In Ctrl+Plus sign (+) Zoom in the currently edited spreadsheet. Zoom Out Ctrl+Minus sign (-) Zoom out the currently edited spreadsheet. Data Selection Select all Ctrl+A, or Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar Select the entire worksheet. Select column Ctrl+Spacebar Select an entire column in a worksheet. Select row Shift+Spacebar Select an entire row in a worksheet. Select fragment Shift+Arrow Select the cell by cell. Select from cursor to beginning of row Shift+Home Select a fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the current row. Select from cursor to end of row Shift+End Select a fragment from the cursor to the end of the current row. Extend the selection to beginning of worksheet Ctrl+Shift+Home Select a fragment from the current selected cells to the beginning of the worksheet. Extend the selection to the last used cell Ctrl+Shift+End Select a fragment from the current selected cells to the last used cell on the worksheet (at the bottommost row with data of the rightmost column with data). If the cursor is in the formula bar, this will select all text in the formula bar from the cursor position to the end without affecting the height of the formula bar. Select one cell to the left Shift+Tab Select one cell to the left in a table. Select one cell to the right Tab Select one cell to the right in a table. Extend the selection to the last nonblank cell Ctrl+Shift+Arrow key Extend the selection to the last nonblank cell in the same column or row as the active cell. If the next cell is blank, the selection will be extended to the next nonblank cell. Undo and Redo Undo Ctrl+Z Reverse the latest performed action. Redo Ctrl+Y Repeat the latest undone action. Cut, Copy, and Paste Cut Ctrl+X, Shift+Delete Cut the the selected data and send them to the computer clipboard memory. The cut data can be later inserted to another place in the same worksheet, into another spreadsheet, or into some other program. Copy Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert Send the selected data to the computer clipboard memory. The copied data can be later inserted to another place in the same worksheet, into another spreadsheet, or into some other program. Paste Ctrl+V, Shift+Insert Insert the previously copied/cut data from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The data can be previously copied from the same worksheet, from another spreadsheet, or from some other program. Data Formatting Bold Ctrl+B Make the font of the selected text fragment bold giving it more weight or remove bold formatting. Italic Ctrl+I Make the font of the selected text fragment italicized giving it some right side tilt or remove italic formatting. Underline Ctrl+U Make the selected text fragment underlined with the line going under the letters or remove underlining. Strikeout Ctrl+5 Make the selected text fragment struck out with the line going through the letters or remove strikeout formatting. Add Hyperlink Ctrl+K Insert a hyperlink to an external website or another worksheet. Edit active cell F2 CONTROL+U (for Mac) Edit the active cell and position the insertion point at the end of the cell contents. If editing in a cell is turned off, the insertion point will be moved into the Formula Bar. Data Filtering Enable/Remove Filter Ctrl+Shift+L Enable a filter for a selected cell range or remove the filter. Format as table template Ctrl+L Apply a table template to a selected cell range. Data Entry Complete cell entry and move down Enter Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the formula bar, and move to the cell below. Complete cell entry and move up Shift+Enter Complete a cell entry in the selected cell, and move to the cell above. Start new line Alt+Enter Start a new line in the same cell. Cancel Esc Cancel an entry in the selected cell or the formula bar. Delete to the left Backspace Delete one character to the left in the formula bar or in the selected cell when the cell editing mode is activated. Also removes the content of the active cell. Delete to the right Delete Delete one character to the right in the formula bar or in the selected cell when the cell editing mode is activated. Also removes the cell contents (data and formulas) from selected cells without affecting cell formats or comments. Clear cell content Delete Remove the content (data and formulas) from selected cells without affecting cell format or comments. Complete a cell entry and move to the right Tab Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the formula bar and move to the cell on the right. Complete a cell entry and move to the left Shift+Tab Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the formula bar and move to the cell on the left . Functions SUM function Alt+Equal sign (=) Insert the SUM function into the selected cell. Open drop-down list Alt+Down arrow Open a selected drop-down list. Open contextual menu Context menu key Open a contextual menu for the selected cell or cell range. Data Formats Open the 'Number Format' dialog box Ctrl+1 Open the Number Format dialog box. Apply the General format Ctrl+Shift+~ Applies the General number format. Apply the Currency format Ctrl+Shift+$ Applies the Currency format with two decimal places (negative numbers in parentheses). Apply the Percentage format Ctrl+Shift+% Applies the Percentage format with no decimal places. Apply the Exponential format Ctrl+Shift+^ Applies the Exponential number format with two decimal places. Apply the Date format Ctrl+Shift+# Applies the Date format with the day, month, and year. Apply the Time format Ctrl+Shift+@ Applies the Time format with the hour and minute, and AM or PM. Apply the Number format Ctrl+Shift+! Applies the Number format with two decimal places, thousands separator, and minus sign (-) for negative values. Modifying Objects Constrain movement Shift+drag Constrain the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. Set 15-degree rotation Shift+drag (when rotating) Constrain the rotation angle to 15-degree increments. Maintain proportions Shift+drag (when resizing) Maintain the proportions of the selected object when resizing. Draw straight line or arrow Shift+drag (when drawing lines/arrows) Draw a straight vertical/horizontal/45-degree line or arrow. Movement by one-pixel increments Ctrl+Arrow keys Hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by one pixel at a time."
     },
    {
         "id": "HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm", 
         "title": "View Settings and Navigation Tools", 
-        "body": "To help you view and select cells in a large spreadsheet Spreadsheet Editor offers several tools: adjustable bars, scrollbars, sheet navigation buttons, sheet tabs and zoom. Adjust the View Settings To adjust default view settings and set the most convenient mode to work with the spreadsheet, switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, click the View settings icon of the top toolbar and select which interface elements you want to be hidden or shown. You can select the following options from the View settings drop-down list: Hide Toolbar - hides the top toolbar that contains commands while tabs remain visible. When this option is enabled, you can click any tab to display the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed until you click anywhere outside it. To disable this mode switch to the Home tab, then click the View settings icon and click the Hide Toolbar option once again. The top toolbar will be displayed all the time. Note: alternatively, you can just double-click any tab to hide the top toolbar or display it again. Hide Formula Bar - hides the bar situated below the top toolbar and used to enter and review the formula and its content. To show the hidden Formula Bar click this option once again. Hide Headings - hides the column heading at the top and row heading at the left of the worksheet. To show the hidden Headings click this option once again. Hide Gridlines - hides the lines that appear around the cells. To show the hidden Gridlines click this option once again. Freeze Panes - freezes all the rows above the active cell and all the columns to the left of the active cell so that they remain visible when you scroll the spreadsheet to the right or down. To unfreeze the panes just click this option once again or right-click anywhere within the worksheet and select the Unfreeze Panes option from the menu. The right sidebar is minimized by default. To expand it, select any object (e.g. image, chart, shape) and click the icon of the currently activated tab on the right. To minimize the right sidebar, click the icon once again. You can also change the size of the opened Comments or Chat panel using the simple drag-and-drop: move the mouse cursor over the left sidebar border so that it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the right to extend the sidebar width. To restore its original width move the border to the left. Use the Navigation Tools To navigate through your spreadsheet, use the following tools: The Scrollbars (on the bottom or right side) are used to scroll up/down and left/right the current sheet. To navigate a spreadsheet using the scrollbars: click the up/down or right/left arrows on the scrollbars; drag the scroll box; click any area to the left/right or above/below the scroll box on the scrollbar. You can also use the mouse scroll wheel to scroll your spreadsheet up or down. The Sheet Navigation buttons are situated in the left lower corner and are used to scroll the sheet list to the right/left and navigate among the sheet tabs. click the Scroll to first sheet button to scroll the sheet list to the first sheet tab of the current spreadsheet; click the Scroll sheet list left button to scroll the sheet list of the current spreadsheet to the left; click the Scroll sheet list right button to scroll the sheet list of the current spreadsheet to the right; click the Scroll to last sheet button to scroll the sheet list to the last sheet tab of the current spreadsheet. To activate an appropriate sheet click its Sheet Tab at the bottom next to the Sheet Navigation buttons. The Zoom buttons are situated in the lower right corner and are used to zoom in and out the current sheet. To change the currently selected zoom value that is displayed in percent, click it and select one of the available zoom options from the list or use the Zoom in or Zoom out buttons. Zoom settings are also available in the View settings drop-down list."
+        "body": "To help you view and select cells in a large spreadsheet Spreadsheet Editor offers several tools: adjustable bars, scrollbars, sheet navigation buttons, sheet tabs and zoom. Adjust the View Settings To adjust default view settings and set the most convenient mode to work with the spreadsheet, click the View settings icon on the right side of the editor header and select which interface elements you want to be hidden or shown. You can select the following options from the View settings drop-down list: Hide Toolbar - hides the top toolbar that contains commands while tabs remain visible. When this option is enabled, you can click any tab to display the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed until you click anywhere outside it. To disable this mode, click the View settings icon and click the Hide Toolbar option once again. The top toolbar will be displayed all the time. Note: alternatively, you can just double-click any tab to hide the top toolbar or display it again. Hide Formula Bar - hides the bar situated below the top toolbar and used to enter and review the formula and its content. To show the hidden Formula Bar click this option once again. Hide Headings - hides the column heading at the top and row heading at the left of the worksheet. To show the hidden Headings click this option once again. Hide Gridlines - hides the lines that appear around the cells. To show the hidden Gridlines click this option once again. Freeze Panes - freezes all the rows above the active cell and all the columns to the left of the active cell so that they remain visible when you scroll the spreadsheet to the right or down. To unfreeze the panes just click this option once again or right-click anywhere within the worksheet and select the Unfreeze Panes option from the menu. The right sidebar is minimized by default. To expand it, select any object (e.g. image, chart, shape) and click the icon of the currently activated tab on the right. To minimize the right sidebar, click the icon once again. You can also change the size of the opened Comments or Chat panel using the simple drag-and-drop: move the mouse cursor over the left sidebar border so that it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the right to extend the sidebar width. To restore its original width move the border to the left. Use the Navigation Tools To navigate through your spreadsheet, use the following tools: The Scrollbars (on the bottom or right side) are used to scroll up/down and left/right the current sheet. To navigate a spreadsheet using the scrollbars: click the up/down or right/left arrows on the scrollbars; drag the scroll box; click any area to the left/right or above/below the scroll box on the scrollbar. You can also use the mouse scroll wheel to scroll your spreadsheet up or down. The Sheet Navigation buttons are situated in the left lower corner and are used to scroll the sheet list to the right/left and navigate among the sheet tabs. click the Scroll to first sheet button to scroll the sheet list to the first sheet tab of the current spreadsheet; click the Scroll sheet list left button to scroll the sheet list of the current spreadsheet to the left; click the Scroll sheet list right button to scroll the sheet list of the current spreadsheet to the right; click the Scroll to last sheet button to scroll the sheet list to the last sheet tab of the current spreadsheet. To activate an appropriate sheet click its Sheet Tab at the bottom next to the Sheet Navigation buttons. The Zoom buttons are situated in the lower right corner and are used to zoom in and out the current sheet. To change the currently selected zoom value that is displayed in percent, click it and select one of the available zoom options from the list or use the Zoom in or Zoom out buttons. Zoom settings are also available in the View settings drop-down list."
     },
    {
         "id": "HelpfulHints/Search.htm", 
         "title": "Search and Replace Functions", 
-        "body": "To search for the needed characters, words or phrases used in the current spreadsheet, click the icon situated at the left sidebar. If you want to search for/replace values within a certain area on the current sheet only, select the necessary cell range and then click the icon. The Find and Replace window will open: Type in your inquiry into the corresponding data entry field. Specify search options clicking the icon next to the data entry field and checking the necesary options: Case sensitive - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is 'Editor' and this option is selected, such words as 'editor' or 'EDITOR' etc. will not be found). Entire cell contents - is used to find only the cells that do not contain any other characters besides the ones specified in your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is '56' and this option is selected, the cells containing such data as '0.56' or '156' etc. will not be found). Within - is used to search within the active Sheet only or the whole Workbook. If you want to perform a search within the selected area on the sheet, make sure that the Sheet option is selected. Search - is used to specify the direction that you want to search: to the right by rows or down by columns. Look in - is used to specify whether you want to search the Value of the cells or their underlying Formulas. Click one of the arrow buttons on the right. The search will be performed either towards the beginning of the worksheet (if you click the button) or towards the end of the worksheet (if you click the button) from the current position. The first occurrence of the required characters in the selected direction will be highlighted. If it is not the word you are looking for, click the selected button again to find the next occurrence of the characters you entered. To replace one or more occurrences of the found characters click the Replace link below the data entry field. The Find and Replace window will change: Type in the replacement text into the bottom data entry field. Click the Replace button to replace the currently selected occurrence or the Replace All button to replace all the found occurrences. To hide the replace field, click the Hide Replace link."
+        "body": "To search for the needed characters, words or phrases used in the current spreadsheet, click the icon situated at the left sidebar or use the Ctrl+F key combination. If you want to search for/replace values within a certain area on the current sheet only, select the necessary cell range and then click the icon. The Find and Replace window will open: Type in your inquiry into the corresponding data entry field. Specify search options clicking the icon next to the data entry field and checking the necesary options: Case sensitive - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is 'Editor' and this option is selected, such words as 'editor' or 'EDITOR' etc. will not be found). Entire cell contents - is used to find only the cells that do not contain any other characters besides the ones specified in your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is '56' and this option is selected, the cells containing such data as '0.56' or '156' etc. will not be found). Within - is used to search within the active Sheet only or the whole Workbook. If you want to perform a search within the selected area on the sheet, make sure that the Sheet option is selected. Search - is used to specify the direction that you want to search: to the right by rows or down by columns. Look in - is used to specify whether you want to search the Value of the cells or their underlying Formulas. Click one of the arrow buttons on the right. The search will be performed either towards the beginning of the worksheet (if you click the button) or towards the end of the worksheet (if you click the button) from the current position. The first occurrence of the required characters in the selected direction will be highlighted. If it is not the word you are looking for, click the selected button again to find the next occurrence of the characters you entered. To replace one or more occurrences of the found characters click the Replace link below the data entry field or use the Ctrl+H key combination. The Find and Replace window will change: Type in the replacement text into the bottom data entry field. Click the Replace button to replace the currently selected occurrence or the Replace All button to replace all the found occurrences. To hide the replace field, click the Hide Replace link."
     },
    {
         "id": "HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm", 
@@ -2253,7 +2253,7 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm", 
         "title": "Home tab", 
-        "body": "The Home tab opens by default when you open a spreadsheet. It allows to format cells and data within them, apply filters, insert functions. Some other options are also available here, such as color schemes, Format as table template feature, view settings and so on. Using this tab, you can: set font type, size, style, and colors, align your data in cells, add cell borders and merge cells, insert functions and create named ranges, sort and filter data, change number format, add or remove cells, rows, columns, copy/clear cell formatting, apply a table template to a selected cell range, adjust View Settings and access the editor Advanced Settings."
+        "body": "The Home tab opens by default when you open a spreadsheet. It allows to format cells and data within them, apply filters, insert functions. Some other options are also available here, such as color schemes, Format as table template feature and so on. Using this tab, you can: set font type, size, style, and colors, align your data in cells, add cell borders and merge cells, insert functions and create named ranges, sort and filter data, change number format, add or remove cells, rows, columns, copy/clear cell formatting, apply a table template to a selected cell range."
     },
    {
         "id": "ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm", 
@@ -2273,7 +2273,7 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", 
         "title": "Introducing the Spreadsheet Editor user interface", 
-        "body": "Spreadsheet Editor uses a tabbed interface where editing commands are grouped into tabs by functionality. The editor interface consists of the following main elements: Editor header displays the logo, menu tabs, spreadsheet name as well as two icons on the right that allow to set access rights and return to the Documents list. Top toolbar displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: File, Home, Insert, Pivot Table, Collaboration, Plugins. The Print, Save, Copy, Paste, Undo and Redo options are always available at the left part of the Top toolbar regardless of the selected tab. Formula bar allows to enter and edit formulas or values in the cells. Formula bar displays the content of the currently selected cell. Status bar at the bottom of the editor window contains some navigation tools: sheet navigation buttons, sheet tabs, and zoom buttons. The Status bar also displays the number of filtered records if you apply a filter, or results of the automatic calculations if you select several cells containing data. Left sidebar contains icons that allow to use the Search and Replace tool, open the Comments and Chat panel, contact our support team and view the information about the program. Right sidebar allows to adjust additional parameters of different objects. When you select a particular object on a worksheet, the corresponding icon is activated at the right sidebar. Click this icon to expand the right sidebar. Working area allows to view spreadsheet content, enter and edit data. Horizontal and vertical Scroll bars allow to scroll up/down and left/right the current sheet. For your convenience you can hide some components and display them again when it is necessary. To learn more on how to adjust view settings please refer to this page."
+        "body": "Spreadsheet Editor uses a tabbed interface where editing commands are grouped into tabs by functionality. The editor interface consists of the following main elements: Editor header displays the logo, menu tabs, spreadsheet name as well as three icons on the right that allow to set access rights, return to the Documents list, adjust View Settings and access the editor Advanced Settings. Top toolbar displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: File, Home, Insert, Pivot Table, Collaboration, Plugins. The Print, Save, Copy, Paste, Undo and Redo options are always available at the left part of the Top toolbar regardless of the selected tab. Formula bar allows to enter and edit formulas or values in the cells. Formula bar displays the content of the currently selected cell. Status bar at the bottom of the editor window contains some navigation tools: sheet navigation buttons, sheet tabs, and zoom buttons. The Status bar also displays the number of filtered records if you apply a filter, or results of the automatic calculations if you select several cells containing data. Left sidebar contains icons that allow to use the Search and Replace tool, open the Comments and Chat panel, contact our support team and view the information about the program. Right sidebar allows to adjust additional parameters of different objects. When you select a particular object on a worksheet, the corresponding icon is activated at the right sidebar. Click this icon to expand the right sidebar. Working area allows to view spreadsheet content, enter and edit data. Horizontal and vertical Scroll bars allow to scroll up/down and left/right the current sheet. For your convenience you can hide some components and display them again when it is necessary. To learn more on how to adjust view settings please refer to this page."
     },
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm", 
@@ -2283,7 +2283,7 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm", 
         "title": "Add hyperlinks", 
-        "body": "To add a hyperlink, select a cell where a hyperlink will be added, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Hyperlink icon at the top toolbar or select the same option from the right-click menu, after that the Hyperlink Settings will appear where you can specify the hyperlink settings: Link Type - select a link type you wish to insert from the drop-down list: Use the External Link option and enter a URL in the format http://www.example.com in the Link to field below if you need to add a hyperlink leading to an external website. Use the Internal Data Range option and select a worksheet and a cell range in the fields below if you need to add a hyperlink leading to a certain cell range in the same spreadsheet. Display - enter a text that will become clickable and lead to the web address specified in the upper field. Note: if the selected cell already contains data, it will be automatically displayed in this field. ScreenTip Text - enter a text that will become visible in a small pop-up window that provides a brief note or label pertaining to the hyperlink being pointed to. click the OK button. When you hover the cursor over the added hyperlink, the ScreenTip will appear containing the text you specified. To follow the link press the CTRL key and click the link in your spreadsheet. To delete the added hyperlink, activate the cell containing the added hyperlink and press the Delete key, or right-click the cell and select the Clear All option from the drop-down list."
+        "body": "To add a hyperlink, select a cell where a hyperlink will be added, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Hyperlink icon at the top toolbar, after that the Hyperlink Settings will appear where you can specify the hyperlink settings: Select a link type you wish to insert: Use the External Link option and enter a URL in the format http://www.example.com in the Link to field below if you need to add a hyperlink leading to an external website. Use the Internal Data Range option and select a worksheet and a cell range in the fields below if you need to add a hyperlink leading to a certain cell range in the same spreadsheet. Display - enter a text that will become clickable and lead to the web address specified in the upper field. Note: if the selected cell already contains data, it will be automatically displayed in this field. ScreenTip Text - enter a text that will become visible in a small pop-up window that provides a brief note or label pertaining to the hyperlink being pointed to. click the OK button. To add a hyperlink, you can also use the Ctrl+K key combination or click with the right mouse button at a position where a hyperlink will be added and select the Hyperlink option in the right-click menu. When you hover the cursor over the added hyperlink, the ScreenTip will appear containing the text you specified. To follow the link press the CTRL key and click the link in your spreadsheet. To delete the added hyperlink, activate the cell containing the added hyperlink and press the Delete key, or right-click the cell and select the Clear All option from the drop-down list."
     },
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/AlignText.htm", 
@@ -2293,7 +2293,7 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm", 
         "title": "Change number format", 
-        "body": "Apply a number format You can easily change the number format, i.e. the way the numbers you enter appear in your spreadsheet. To do that, select a cell, a range of cells with the mouse or the whole worksheet by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination, Note: you can also select multiple non-adjacent cells or cell ranges holding down the Ctrl key while selecting cells/ranges with the mouse. drop-down the Number format list situated at the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the number format you wish to apply: General - is used to display the data you enter as plain numbers in the most compact way without any additional signs, Number - is used to display the numbers with 0-30 digits after the decimal point where a thousand separator is added between each group of three digits before the decimal point, Scientific (exponential) - is used to keep short the numbers converting in a string of type d.dddE+ddd or d.dddE-ddd where each d is a digit 0 to 9, Accounting - is used to display monetary values with the default currency symbol and two decimal places. To apply another currency symbol or number of decimal places, follow the instructions below. Unlike the Currency format, the Accounting format aligns currency symbols by the left side of the cell, represents zero values as dashes and displays negative values in parentheses. Note: to quickly apply the Accounting format to the selected data, you can also click the Accounting style icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary currency symbol: one of the following currency symbols: &#36; Dollar, &euro; Euro, &pound Pound, &#8381; Rouble, &yen Yen. Currency - is used to display monetary values with the default currency symbol and two decimal places. To apply another currency symbol or number of decimal places, follow the instructions below. Unlike the Accounting format, the Currency format places a currency symbol directly before the first digit and displays negative values with the negative sign (-). Date - is used to display dates, Time - is used to display time, Persentage - is used to display the data as a percentage accompanied by a percent sign %, Note: to quickly apply the percent style to your data you can also use the Percent style icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar. Fraction - is used to display the numbers as common fractions rather than decimals. Text - is used to display the numeric values as a plain text with as much precision as available. More formats - is used to customize the already applied number formats specifying additional parameters (see the description below). change the number of decimal places, if needed: use the Increase decimal icon situated at the Home tab of the top toolbar to display more digits after the decimal point, use the Decrease decimal icon situated at the Home tab of the top toolbar to display fewer digits after the decimal point. Customize the number format You can customize the applied number format in the following way: select the cells you want to customize the number format for, drop-down the Number format list at the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the More formats option, in the Number Format window that opens, adjust the available parameters. The options differ depending on the number format that is applied to the selected cells. You can use the Category list to change the number format. for the Number format, you can set the number of Decimal points, specify if you want to Use 1000 separator or not and choose one of the available Formats for displaying negative values. for the Scientific and Persentage formats, you can set the number of Decimal points. for the Accounting and Currency formats, you can set the number of Decimal points, choose one of the available currency Symbols and one of the available Formats for displaying negative values. for the Date format, you can select one of the available date formats: 4/15, 4/15/06, 04/15/06, 4/15/2006, 4/15/06 0:00, 4/15/06 12:00 AM, A, April 15 2006, 15-Apr, 15-Apr-06, Apr-06, April-06, A-06, 06-Apr, 15-Apr-2006, 2006-Apr-15, 06-Apr-15, 15/Apr, 15/Apr/06, Apr/06, April/06, A/06, 06/Apr, 15/Apr/2006, 2006/Apr/15, 06/Apr/15, 15 Apr, 15 Apr 06, Apr 06, April 06, A 06, 06 Apr, 15 Apr 2006, 2006 Apr 15, 06 Apr 15, 06/4/15, 06/04/15, 2006/4/15. for the Time format, you can select one of the available time formats: 12:48:58 PM, 12:48, 12:48 PM, 12:48:58, 48:57.6, 36:48:58. for the Fraction format, you can select one of the available formats: Up to one digit (1/3), Up to two digits (12/25), Up to three digits (131/135), As halves (1/2), As fourths (2/4), As eighths (4/8), As sixteenths (8/16), As tenths (5/10) , As hundredths (50/100). click the OK button to apply the changes."
+        "body": "Apply a number format You can easily change the number format, i.e. the way the numbers you enter appear in your spreadsheet. To do that, select a cell, a range of cells with the mouse or the whole worksheet by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination, Note: you can also select multiple non-adjacent cells or cell ranges holding down the Ctrl key while selecting cells/ranges with the mouse. drop-down the Number format list situated at the Home tab of the top toolbar or right-click the selected cells and use the Number Format option from the contextual menu. Select the number format you wish to apply: General - is used to display the data you enter as plain numbers in the most compact way without any additional signs, Number - is used to display the numbers with 0-30 digits after the decimal point where a thousand separator is added between each group of three digits before the decimal point, Scientific (exponential) - is used to keep short the numbers converting in a string of type d.dddE+ddd or d.dddE-ddd where each d is a digit 0 to 9, Accounting - is used to display monetary values with the default currency symbol and two decimal places. To apply another currency symbol or number of decimal places, follow the instructions below. Unlike the Currency format, the Accounting format aligns currency symbols by the left side of the cell, represents zero values as dashes and displays negative values in parentheses. Note: to quickly apply the Accounting format to the selected data, you can also click the Accounting style icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary currency symbol: one of the following currency symbols: &#36; Dollar, &euro; Euro, &pound Pound, &#8381; Rouble, &yen Yen. Currency - is used to display monetary values with the default currency symbol and two decimal places. To apply another currency symbol or number of decimal places, follow the instructions below. Unlike the Accounting format, the Currency format places a currency symbol directly before the first digit and displays negative values with the negative sign (-). Date - is used to display dates, Time - is used to display time, Percentage - is used to display the data as a percentage accompanied by a percent sign %, Note: to quickly apply the percent style to your data you can also use the Percent style icon at the Home tab of the top toolbar. Fraction - is used to display the numbers as common fractions rather than decimals. Text - is used to display the numeric values as a plain text with as much precision as available. More formats - is used to customize the already applied number formats specifying additional parameters (see the description below). change the number of decimal places, if needed: use the Increase decimal icon situated at the Home tab of the top toolbar to display more digits after the decimal point, use the Decrease decimal icon situated at the Home tab of the top toolbar to display fewer digits after the decimal point. Note: to change a number format you can also use keyboard shortcuts. Customize the number format You can customize the applied number format in the following way: select the cells you want to customize the number format for, drop-down the Number format list at the Home tab of the top toolbar or right-click the selected cells and use the Number Format option from the contextual menu, select the More formats option, in the Number Format window that opens, adjust the available parameters. The options differ depending on the number format that is applied to the selected cells. You can use the Category list to change the number format. for the Number format, you can set the number of Decimal points, specify if you want to Use 1000 separator or not and choose one of the available Formats for displaying negative values. for the Scientific and Persentage formats, you can set the number of Decimal points. for the Accounting and Currency formats, you can set the number of Decimal points, choose one of the available currency Symbols and one of the available Formats for displaying negative values. for the Date format, you can select one of the available date formats: 4/15, 4/15/06, 04/15/06, 4/15/2006, 4/15/06 0:00, 4/15/06 12:00 AM, A, April 15 2006, 15-Apr, 15-Apr-06, Apr-06, April-06, A-06, 06-Apr, 15-Apr-2006, 2006-Apr-15, 06-Apr-15, 15/Apr, 15/Apr/06, Apr/06, April/06, A/06, 06/Apr, 15/Apr/2006, 2006/Apr/15, 06/Apr/15, 15 Apr, 15 Apr 06, Apr 06, April 06, A 06, 06 Apr, 15 Apr 2006, 2006 Apr 15, 06 Apr 15, 06/4/15, 06/04/15, 2006/4/15. for the Time format, you can select one of the available time formats: 12:48:58 PM, 12:48, 12:48 PM, 12:48:58, 48:57.6, 36:48:58. for the Fraction format, you can select one of the available formats: Up to one digit (1/3), Up to two digits (12/25), Up to three digits (131/135), As halves (1/2), As fourths (2/4), As eighths (4/8), As sixteenths (8/16), As tenths (5/10) , As hundredths (50/100). click the OK button to apply the changes."
     },
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/ClearFormatting.htm", 
@@ -2333,12 +2333,12 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertFunction.htm", 
         "title": "Insert function", 
-        "body": "The ability to perform basic calculations is the principal reason for using a spreadsheet. Some of them are performed automatically when you select a range of cells in your spreadsheet: AVERAGE is used to analyze the selected range of cells and find the average value. COUNT is used to count the number of the selected cells containing values ignoring empty cells. SUM is used to add all the numbers in the selected range ignoring empty cells or those contaning text. The results of these calculations are displayed in the right lower corner at the status bar. To perform any other calculations you can insert a needed formula manually using the common mathematical operators or insert a predefined formula - Function. To insert a function, select a cell you wish to insert a function into, click the Insert function icon situated at the Home tab of the top toolbar and select one of the commonly used functions (SUM, MIN, MAX, COUNT) or click the Additional option, or right-click within a selected cell and select the Insert Function option from the menu, or click the icon before the formula bar, in the Insert Function window that opens, select the necessary function group, then choose the function you need from the list and click OK. enter the function arguments either manually or dragging to select a range of cells to be included as an argument. If the function requires several arguments, they must be separated by commas. Note: generally, numeric values, logical values (TRUE, FALSE), text values (must be quoted), cell references, cell range references, names assigned to ranges and other functions can be used as function arguments. Press the Enter key. Here is the list of the available functions grouped by categories: Function Category Description Functions Text and Data Functions Are used to correctly display the text data in your spreadsheet. CHAR; CLEAN; CODE; CONCATENATE; CONCAT; DOLLAR; EXACT; FIND; FINDB; FIXED; LEFT; LEFTB; LEN; LENB; LOWER; MID; MIDB; NUMBERVALUE; PROPER; REPLACE; REPLACEB; REPT; RIGHT; RIGHTB; SEARCH; SEARCHB; SUBSTITUTE; T; TEXT; TEXTJOIN; TRIM; UNICHAR; UNICODE; UPPER; VALUE Statistical Functions Are used to analyze data: finding the average value, the largest or smallest values in a range of cells. AVEDEV; AVERAGE; AVERAGEA; AVERAGEIF; AVERAGEIFS; BETADIST; BETA.DIST; BETA.INV; BINOMDIST; BINOM.DIST; BINOM.DIST.RANGE; BINOM.INV; CHIDIST; CHIINV; CHISQ.DIST; CHISQ.DIST.RT; CHISQ.INV; CHISQ.INV.RT; CHITEST; CHISQ.TEST; CONFIDENCE; CONFIDENCE.NORM; CONFIDENCE.T; CORREL; COUNT; COUNTA; COUNBLANK; COUNTIF; COUNTIFS; COVAR; COVARIANCE.P; COVARIANCE.S; CRITBINOM; DEVSQ; EXPON.DIST; EXPONDIST; F.DIST; FDIST; F.DIST.RT; F.INV; FINV; F.INV.RT; FISHER; FISHERINV; FORECAST; FORECAST.ETS; FORECAST.ETS.CONFINT; FORECAST.ETS.SEASONALITY; FORECAST.ETS.STAT; FORECAST.LINEAR; FREQUENCY; FTEST; F.TEST; GAMMA; GAMMA.DIST; GAMMADIST; GAMMA.INV; GAMMAINV; GAMMALN; GAMMALN.PRECISE; GAUSS; GEOMEAN; HARMEAN; HYPGEOMDIST; HYPGEOM.DIST; INTERCEPT; KURT; LARGE; LOGINV; LOGNORM.DIST; LOGNORM.INV; LOGNORMDIST; MAX; MAXA; MAXIFS; MEDIAN; MIN; MINA; MINIFS; MODE; MODE.MULT; MODE.SNGL; NEGBINOMDIST; NEGBINOM.DIST; NORMDIST; NORM.DIST; NORMINV; NORM.INV; NORMSDIST; NORM.S.DIST; NORMSINV; NORM.S.INV; PEARSON; PERCENTILE; PERCENTILE.EXC; PERCENTILE.INC; PERCENTRANK; PERCENTRANK.EXC; PERCENTRANK.INC; PERMUT; PERMUTATIONA; PHI; POISSON; POISSON.DIST; PROB; QUARTILE; QUARTILE.EXC; QUARTILE.INC; RANK; RANK.AVG; RANK.EQ; RSQ; SKEW; SKEW.P; SLOPE; SMALL; STANDARDIZE; STDEV; STDEV.S; STDEVA; STDEVP; STDEV.P; STDEVPA; STEYX; TDIST; T.DIST; T.DIST.2T; T.DIST.RT; T.INV; TRIMMEAN; TTEST; T.TEST; T.INV.2T; TINV; VAR; VARA; VARP; VAR.P; VAR.S; VARPA; WEIBULL; WEIBULL.DIST; ZTEST; Z.TEST Financial Functions Are used to perform some financial calculations calculating the net present value, payments etc. ACCRINT; ACCRINTM; AMORDEGRC; AMORLINC; COUPDAYBS; COUPDAYS; COUPDAYSNC; COUPNCD; COUPNUM; COUPPCD; CUMIPMT; CUMPRINC; DB; DDB; DISC; DOLLARDE; DOLLARFR; DURATION; EFFECT; FV; FVSCHEDULE; INTRATE; IPMT; IRR; ISPMT; MDURATION; MIRR; NOMINAL; NPER; NPV; ODDFPRICE; ODDFYIELD; ODDLPRICE; ODDLYIELD; PDURATION; PMT; PPMT; PRICE; PRICEDISC; PRICEMAT; PV; RATE; RECEIVED; RRI; SLN; SYD; TBILLEQ; TBILLPRICE; TBILLYIELD; VDB; XIRR; XNPV; YIELD; YIELDDISC; YIELDMAT Math and Trigonometry Functions Are used to perform basic math and trigonometry operations such as adding, multiplying, dividing, rounding, etc. ABS; ACOS; ACOSH; ACOT; ACOTH; AGGREGATE; ARABIC; ASIN; ASINH; ATAN; ATAN2; ATANH; BASE; CEILING; CEILING.MATH; CEILING.PRECISE; COMBIN; COMBINA; COS; COSH; COT; COTH; CSC; CSCH; DECIMAL; DEGREES; ECMA.CEILING; EVEN; EXP; FACT; FACTDOUBLE; FLOOR; FLOOR.PRECISE; FLOOR.MATH; GCD; INT; ISO.CEILING; LCM; LN; LOG; LOG10; MDETERM; MINVERSE; MMULT; MOD; MROUND; MULTINOMIAL; ODD; PI; POWER; PRODUCT; QUOTIENT; RADIANS; RAND; RANDBETWEEN; ROMAN; ROUND; ROUNDDOWN; ROUNDUP; SEC; SECH; SERIESSUM; SIGN; SIN; SINH; SQRT; SQRTPI; SUBTOTAL; SUM; SUMIF; SUMIFS; SUMPRODUCT; SUMSQ; SUMX2MY2; SUMX2PY2; SUMXMY2; TAN; TANH; TRUNC Lookup and Reference Functions Are used to easily find the information from the data list. ADDRESS; CHOOSE; COLUMN; COLUMNS; FORMULATEXT; HLOOKUP; INDEX; INDIRECT; LOOKUP; MATCH; OFFSET; ROW; ROWS; TRANSPOSE; VLOOKUP Date and Time Functions Are used to correctly display date and time in your spreadsheet. DATE; DATEDIF; DATEVALUE; DAY; DAYS; DAYS360; EDATE; EOMONTH; HOUR; ISOWEEKNUM; MINUTE; MONTH; NETWORKDAYS; NETWORKDAYS.INTL; NOW; SECOND; TIME; TIMEVALUE; TODAY; WEEKDAY; WEEKNUM; WORKDAY; WORKDAY.INTL; YEAR; YEARFRAC Engineering Functions Are used to perform some engineering calculations: converting between different bases, finding complex numbers etc. BESSELI; BESSELJ; BESSELK; BESSELY; BIN2DEC; BIN2HEX; BIN2OCT; BITAND; BITLSHIFT; BITOR; BITRSHIFT; BITXOR; COMPLEX; CONVERT; DEC2BIN; DEC2HEX; DEC2OCT; DELTA; ERF; ERF.PRECISE; ERFC; ERFC.PRECISE; GESTEP; HEX2BIN; HEX2DEC; HEX2OCT; IMABS; IMAGINARY; IMARGUMENT; IMCONJUGATE; IMCOS; IMCOSH; IMCOT; IMCSC; IMCSCH; IMDIV; IMEXP; IMLN; IMLOG10; IMLOG2; IMPOWER; IMPRODUCT; IMREAL; IMSEC; IMSECH; IMSIN; IMSINH; IMSQRT; IMSUB; IMSUM; IMTAN; OCT2BIN; OCT2DEC; OCT2HEX Database Functions Are used to perform calculations for the values in a certain field of the database that correspond to the specified criteria. DAVERAGE; DCOUNT; DCOUNTA; DGET; DMAX; DMIN; DPRODUCT; DSTDEV; DSTDEVP; DSUM; DVAR; DVARP Information Functions Are used to give you the information about the data in the selected cell or a range of cells. ERROR.TYPE; ISBLANK; ISERR; ISERROR; ISEVEN; ISFORMULA; ISLOGICAL; ISNA; ISNONTEXT; ISNUMBER; ISODD; ISREF; ISTEXT; N; NA; SHEET; SHEETS; TYPE Logical Functions Are used to check if a condition is true or false. AND; FALSE; IF; IFERROR; IFNA; IFS; NOT; OR; SWITCH; TRUE; XOR"
+        "body": "The ability to perform basic calculations is the principal reason for using a spreadsheet. Some of them are performed automatically when you select a range of cells in your spreadsheet: AVERAGE is used to analyze the selected range of cells and find the average value. COUNT is used to count the number of the selected cells containing values ignoring empty cells. SUM is used to add all the numbers in the selected range ignoring empty cells or those contaning text. The results of these calculations are displayed in the right lower corner at the status bar. To perform any other calculations you can insert a needed formula manually using the common mathematical operators or insert a predefined formula - Function. To insert a function, select a cell you wish to insert a function into, click the Insert function icon situated at the Home tab of the top toolbar and select one of the commonly used functions (SUM, MIN, MAX, COUNT) or click the Additional option, or right-click within a selected cell and select the Insert Function option from the menu, or click the icon before the formula bar, in the Insert Function window that opens, select the necessary function group, then choose the function you need from the list and click OK. enter the function arguments either manually or dragging to select a range of cells to be included as an argument. If the function requires several arguments, they must be separated by commas. Note: generally, numeric values, logical values (TRUE, FALSE), text values (must be quoted), cell references, cell range references, names assigned to ranges and other functions can be used as function arguments. Press the Enter key. Here is the list of the available functions grouped by categories: Function Category Description Functions Text and Data Functions Are used to correctly display the text data in your spreadsheet. CHAR; CLEAN; CODE; CONCATENATE; CONCAT; DOLLAR; EXACT; FIND; FINDB; FIXED; LEFT; LEFTB; LEN; LENB; LOWER; MID; MIDB; NUMBERVALUE; PROPER; REPLACE; REPLACEB; REPT; RIGHT; RIGHTB; SEARCH; SEARCHB; SUBSTITUTE; T; TEXT; TEXTJOIN; TRIM; UNICHAR; UNICODE; UPPER; VALUE Statistical Functions Are used to analyze data: finding the average value, the largest or smallest values in a range of cells. AVEDEV; AVERAGE; AVERAGEA; AVERAGEIF; AVERAGEIFS; BETADIST; BETA.DIST; BETA.INV; BINOMDIST; BINOM.DIST; BINOM.DIST.RANGE; BINOM.INV; CHIDIST; CHIINV; CHISQ.DIST; CHISQ.DIST.RT; CHISQ.INV; CHISQ.INV.RT; CHITEST; CHISQ.TEST; CONFIDENCE; CONFIDENCE.NORM; CONFIDENCE.T; CORREL; COUNT; COUNTA; COUNBLANK; COUNTIF; COUNTIFS; COVAR; COVARIANCE.P; COVARIANCE.S; CRITBINOM; DEVSQ; EXPON.DIST; EXPONDIST; F.DIST; FDIST; F.DIST.RT; F.INV; FINV; F.INV.RT; FISHER; FISHERINV; FORECAST; FORECAST.ETS; FORECAST.ETS.CONFINT; FORECAST.ETS.SEASONALITY; FORECAST.ETS.STAT; FORECAST.LINEAR; FREQUENCY; FTEST; F.TEST; GAMMA; GAMMA.DIST; GAMMADIST; GAMMA.INV; GAMMAINV; GAMMALN; GAMMALN.PRECISE; GAUSS; GEOMEAN; HARMEAN; HYPGEOMDIST; HYPGEOM.DIST; INTERCEPT; KURT; LARGE; LOGINV; LOGNORM.DIST; LOGNORM.INV; LOGNORMDIST; MAX; MAXA; MAXIFS; MEDIAN; MIN; MINA; MINIFS; MODE; MODE.MULT; MODE.SNGL; NEGBINOMDIST; NEGBINOM.DIST; NORMDIST; NORM.DIST; NORMINV; NORM.INV; NORMSDIST; NORM.S.DIST; NORMSINV; NORM.S.INV; PEARSON; PERCENTILE; PERCENTILE.EXC; PERCENTILE.INC; PERCENTRANK; PERCENTRANK.EXC; PERCENTRANK.INC; PERMUT; PERMUTATIONA; PHI; POISSON; POISSON.DIST; PROB; QUARTILE; QUARTILE.EXC; QUARTILE.INC; RANK; RANK.AVG; RANK.EQ; RSQ; SKEW; SKEW.P; SLOPE; SMALL; STANDARDIZE; STDEV; STDEV.S; STDEVA; STDEVP; STDEV.P; STDEVPA; STEYX; TDIST; T.DIST; T.DIST.2T; T.DIST.RT; T.INV; T.INV.2T; TINV; TRIMMEAN; TTEST; T.TEST; VAR; VARA; VARP; VAR.P; VAR.S; VARPA; WEIBULL; WEIBULL.DIST; ZTEST; Z.TEST Financial Functions Are used to perform some financial calculations calculating the net present value, payments etc. ACCRINT; ACCRINTM; AMORDEGRC; AMORLINC; COUPDAYBS; COUPDAYS; COUPDAYSNC; COUPNCD; COUPNUM; COUPPCD; CUMIPMT; CUMPRINC; DB; DDB; DISC; DOLLARDE; DOLLARFR; DURATION; EFFECT; FV; FVSCHEDULE; INTRATE; IPMT; IRR; ISPMT; MDURATION; MIRR; NOMINAL; NPER; NPV; ODDFPRICE; ODDFYIELD; ODDLPRICE; ODDLYIELD; PDURATION; PMT; PPMT; PRICE; PRICEDISC; PRICEMAT; PV; RATE; RECEIVED; RRI; SLN; SYD; TBILLEQ; TBILLPRICE; TBILLYIELD; VDB; XIRR; XNPV; YIELD; YIELDDISC; YIELDMAT Math and Trigonometry Functions Are used to perform basic math and trigonometry operations such as adding, multiplying, dividing, rounding, etc. ABS; ACOS; ACOSH; ACOT; ACOTH; AGGREGATE; ARABIC; ASIN; ASINH; ATAN; ATAN2; ATANH; BASE; CEILING; CEILING.MATH; CEILING.PRECISE; COMBIN; COMBINA; COS; COSH; COT; COTH; CSC; CSCH; DECIMAL; DEGREES; ECMA.CEILING; EVEN; EXP; FACT; FACTDOUBLE; FLOOR; FLOOR.PRECISE; FLOOR.MATH; GCD; INT; ISO.CEILING; LCM; LN; LOG; LOG10; MDETERM; MINVERSE; MMULT; MOD; MROUND; MULTINOMIAL; ODD; PI; POWER; PRODUCT; QUOTIENT; RADIANS; RAND; RANDBETWEEN; ROMAN; ROUND; ROUNDDOWN; ROUNDUP; SEC; SECH; SERIESSUM; SIGN; SIN; SINH; SQRT; SQRTPI; SUBTOTAL; SUM; SUMIF; SUMIFS; SUMPRODUCT; SUMSQ; SUMX2MY2; SUMX2PY2; SUMXMY2; TAN; TANH; TRUNC Lookup and Reference Functions Are used to easily find the information from the data list. ADDRESS; CHOOSE; COLUMN; COLUMNS; FORMULATEXT; HLOOKUP; INDEX; INDIRECT; LOOKUP; MATCH; OFFSET; ROW; ROWS; TRANSPOSE; VLOOKUP Date and Time Functions Are used to correctly display date and time in your spreadsheet. DATE; DATEDIF; DATEVALUE; DAY; DAYS; DAYS360; EDATE; EOMONTH; HOUR; ISOWEEKNUM; MINUTE; MONTH; NETWORKDAYS; NETWORKDAYS.INTL; NOW; SECOND; TIME; TIMEVALUE; TODAY; WEEKDAY; WEEKNUM; WORKDAY; WORKDAY.INTL; YEAR; YEARFRAC Engineering Functions Are used to perform some engineering calculations: converting between different bases, finding complex numbers etc. BESSELI; BESSELJ; BESSELK; BESSELY; BIN2DEC; BIN2HEX; BIN2OCT; BITAND; BITLSHIFT; BITOR; BITRSHIFT; BITXOR; COMPLEX; CONVERT; DEC2BIN; DEC2HEX; DEC2OCT; DELTA; ERF; ERF.PRECISE; ERFC; ERFC.PRECISE; GESTEP; HEX2BIN; HEX2DEC; HEX2OCT; IMABS; IMAGINARY; IMARGUMENT; IMCONJUGATE; IMCOS; IMCOSH; IMCOT; IMCSC; IMCSCH; IMDIV; IMEXP; IMLN; IMLOG10; IMLOG2; IMPOWER; IMPRODUCT; IMREAL; IMSEC; IMSECH; IMSIN; IMSINH; IMSQRT; IMSUB; IMSUM; IMTAN; OCT2BIN; OCT2DEC; OCT2HEX Database Functions Are used to perform calculations for the values in a certain field of the database that correspond to the specified criteria. DAVERAGE; DCOUNT; DCOUNTA; DGET; DMAX; DMIN; DPRODUCT; DSTDEV; DSTDEVP; DSUM; DVAR; DVARP Information Functions Are used to give you the information about the data in the selected cell or a range of cells. ERROR.TYPE; ISBLANK; ISERR; ISERROR; ISEVEN; ISFORMULA; ISLOGICAL; ISNA; ISNONTEXT; ISNUMBER; ISODD; ISREF; ISTEXT; N; NA; SHEET; SHEETS; TYPE Logical Functions Are used to check if a condition is true or false. AND; FALSE; IF; IFERROR; IFNA; IFS; NOT; OR; SWITCH; TRUE; XOR"
     },
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm", 
         "title": "Insert images", 
-        "body": "Spreadsheet Editor allows you to insert images in the most popular formats into your worksheet. The following image formats are supported: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Insert an image To insert an image into the spreadsheet, place the cursor where you want the image to be put, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Picture icon at the top toolbar, select one of the following options to load the image: the Picture from File option will open the standard Windows dialog window for file selection. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary file and click the Open button the Picture from URL option will open the window where you can enter the necessary image web address and click the OK button After that the image will be added to the worksheet. Adjust the image settings Once the image is added you can change its size and position. To specify exact image dimensions: select the image you wish to resize with the mouse, click the Image settings icon at the right sidebar, in the Size section, set the necessary Width and Height values. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. To restore the default size of the added image, click the Default Size button. To replace the inserted image, select the image you wish to replace with the mouse, click the Image settings icon at the right sidebar, in the Replace Image section click the button you need: From File or From URL and select the desired image. The selected image will be replaced. When the image is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab at the right sidebar and adjust the shape Stroke type, size and color as well as change the shape type selecting another shape from the Change Autoshape menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly. To change its advanced settings, click the image with the right mouse button and select the Image Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The image properties window will open: The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image. To delete the inserted image, click it and press the Delete key."
+        "body": "Spreadsheet Editor allows you to insert images in the most popular formats into your worksheet. The following image formats are supported: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Insert an image To insert an image into the spreadsheet, place the cursor where you want the image to be put, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Picture icon at the top toolbar, select one of the following options to load the image: the Picture from File option will open the standard Windows dialog window for file selection. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary file and click the Open button the Picture from URL option will open the window where you can enter the necessary image web address and click the OK button After that the image will be added to the worksheet. Adjust the image settings Once the image is added you can change its size and position. To specify exact image dimensions: select the image you wish to resize with the mouse, click the Image settings icon at the right sidebar, in the Size section, set the necessary Width and Height values. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. To restore the default size of the added image, click the Default Size button. To replace the inserted image, select the image you wish to replace with the mouse, click the Image settings icon at the right sidebar, in the Replace Image section click the button you need: From File or From URL and select the desired image. Note: alternatively, you can right-click the image and use the Replace image option from the contextual menu. The selected image will be replaced. When the image is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab at the right sidebar and adjust the shape Stroke type, size and color as well as change the shape type selecting another shape from the Change Autoshape menu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly. To change its advanced settings, click the image with the right mouse button and select the Image Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar. The image properties window will open: The Alternative Text tab allows to specify a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information there is in the image. To delete the inserted image, click it and press the Delete key."
     },
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm", 
@@ -2358,7 +2358,7 @@ var indexes =
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/MergeCells.htm", 
         "title": "Merge cells", 
-        "body": "You can merge two or more adjacent cells into one cell. To do that, select two cells or a range of cells with the mouse, Note: the selected cells MUST be adjacent. click the Merge icon situated at the Home tab of the top toolbar and select one of the available options: Note: only the data in the upper-left cell of the selected range will remain in the merged cell. Data in other cells of the selected range will be deleted. if you select the Merge &amp; Center option the cells of the selected range will be merged and the data will be centered in the merged cells; if you select the Merge Across option the cells of each row of the selected range will be merged and the data will be aligned to the left side of the merged cells; if you select the Merge Cells option the cells of the selected range will be merged and the data will be aligned by the bottom vertically and by the left side horizontally. To split the previously merged cell use the Unmerge Cells option from the Merge drop-down list. The data of the merged cell will be displayed in the upper-left cell."
+        "body": "You can merge two or more adjacent cells into one cell. To do that, select two cells or a range of cells with the mouse, Note: the selected cells MUST be adjacent. click the Merge icon situated at the Home tab of the top toolbar and select one of the available options: Note: only the data in the upper-left cell of the selected range will remain in the merged cell. Data in other cells of the selected range will be deleted. if you select the Merge &amp; Center option the cells of the selected range will be merged and the data in the merged cell will be centered; if you select the Merge Across option the cells of each row of the selected range will be merged and the data in the merged cells will be aligned by the left side (for text) or by the right side (for numeric values); if you select the Merge Cells option the cells of the selected range will be merged and the data will be aligned by the left side (for text) or by the right side (for numeric values). To split the previously merged cell use the Unmerge Cells option from the Merge drop-down list. The data of the merged cell will be displayed in the upper-left cell."
     },
    {
         "id": "UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm",